236
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MODEL 9112 October 1989

9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    9

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

MODEL 9112

October 1989

Page 2: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

I TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 General InformationPurpose 1-1Unpacking and Inspection 1-1Warranty 1-1Product Assistance 1-2Maintenance Agreements 1-2Documentation Discrepancies 1-2Software Licensing Agreement 1-2Service Procedure 1-3

2 Product Description9112 System Description 2-19112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-29112 Architecture 2-3Front Panel Controls, Connections and Indicators 2-9Rear Panel Controls, and Connections 2-11Specifications 2-13

3 OperationsPreparation For Use 3-1Standard Functions 3-3Arbitrary Waveforms and File Conventions 3-4Defining An Arbitrary Waveform In TermsOf A Waveform File 3-5

Transferring Waveform Data Files Into theAFG RAM Disk Via GPIB 3-6

Loading the Waveform Files From RAM DiskInto the Waveform Generator Circuit 3-9

Control Settings Summary- (amplitude, clock .... ) 3-12Specifying How the Data Values AreConverted to Voltage Levels 3-13

Specifying the Time Per Point 3-14Specifying the Trigger Delay 3-27Specifying External Triggering 3-27Disconnecting the Output While the Generatoris Running 3-27

Inverting Channel 1 or 2 3-27Using an External Clock Reference 3-28Using an External Clock Source 3-28Synchronizing with Another 9112 AFG 3-28Starting and Stopping the Waveform 3-29Automating the Setup and Loading of Waveforms 3-30

Page 3: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

! TABLE OF CONTENTS

4 Operating InstructionsBasic DescriptionMain Menu KeysUnderstanding the 9100/CP MenusEntry ChangesControlling the Arbitrary Function Generatorwith the 9100/CP

Selecting an Arbitrary WaveformSelecting a Standard WaveformSelecting Attributes of Standard SineSelecting Attributes of Standard SquareSelecting Attributes of Standard TriangleSelecting Attributes of Standard RampSelecting Attributes of Standard PulseSelecting Attributes of Standard DCChannel 1 Waveform AttributesChannel 2 Waveform AttributesControlling the TimebaseTrigger ControlArming and Firing TriggerWorking with Setup FilesWorking with Sequence FilesLoading and Linking WaveformsExecuting WaveformsAborting WaveformsAccessing the State of the AFG

5 Operating over the GPIB

GeneralIntroductionRemote ModeLocal ModeAddressingMessagesDevice Dependent MessagesGeneral Rules for CommandsIEEE-488 Standard MessagesReceiving the Device Clear MessageReceiving the Trigger MessageReceiving the Remote MessageReceiving the Local MessageReceiving the Local Lockout MessagesSending MessagesSending the Require Service Message (SRQ)Sending the Serial Poll Status ByteSending the Secondary Status Bytes

4-14-5

4-104-17

4-204-214-234-254-254-264-274-274-284-294-324-324-364-394-404-414-424-444-444-44

5-I5-I5-I5-15-25-25-45-55-55-55-55-55-55-65-65-65-7

Page 4: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

[ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Operation of the Status BytesAcronym GuidelinesProgramming Command SectionCommand Summary

File Handling CommandsFile StructuresSetup and Sequence FilesSetup FilesExecuting Setup FilesSequence FilesExecuting Sequence FilesSingle Waveform FilesDual Waveform FilesExecuting Waveform Files

File Handling CommandsDELETEENDLEARN SETUPLINKLOADRECALLSEQUENCESETUPSTORE

Action CommandsABORTARBITRARYARMCALIBRATECLEARGONEXTSELFTESTSTOPTRIGGER

Channel Parameter CommandsCH 1_AMPLITUDE (CH2_AMPLTUDE)CH1 DIGITAL WORD(CH2._DIGITAL_WORD)CH1 INVERT (CH2_INVERT)CH1-LOAD COMP (CH2)LOAD_COMP)CH I~_OFFSE-T (CH2_OFFSET)CH1 OUTPUT (CH2_OUTPUT)CH I_-ZERO_REF (CH2_ZERO_REF)

5-75-13

5-155-185-185-195-195-205-205-225-225-225-23

5-245-255-265-275-295-305-315-325-33

5-345-355-365-375-385-395-405-415-425-43

5-44

5-455-465-475-485-495-50

Page 5: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

[ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Timebase CommandsCLOCK_SOURCECLOCK_LEVELCLOCK_MODECLOCK RATECLOCK_SLOPECLOCK_PERIODCLOCK_REFERENCE

Trigger CommandsDELAY MODEMARKER DELAYTRIG ARM SOURCETRIO_-DELAYTRIG LEVELTRIG MODEITRIO SLOPETRIO SOURCE

Standard Function CommandsSTANDARDSINESINE_MODESINE_FREQUENCYSINE CH1 PHASESINE CH2 PHASESQU,~RE -SQUARE_MODESQUARE_FREQUENCYSQUARE_PHASESQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASETRIANGLETRIANGLE MODEm

TRIANGLE_FREQUENCYTRIANGLE PHASETRIANGLE RELATIVE PHASERAMPRAMP MODERAMP PERIODRAMP PHASERAMP RELATIVE PHASEPULSE-PULSE WIDTHPULSE_PERIODPULSE DELAYPULSE_OPTIMIZEDC

5-515-525-535-545-555-565-57

5-585-595-605-615-625-635-645-65

5-675-685-695-705-715-725-735-745-755-765-775-785-795-805-815-825-835-845-855-865-875-885-895-905-915-925-93

Page 6: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DC MODEDC~_VOLTS (DC2_VOLTS)

Query Type CommandsACTIVE FILESFUNCTIONEXISTDIRECTORYIDENTIFYMEMORYVIEW

Communication CommandsCOMM BLOCKSIZECOMM FORMATCOMM HEADERMASKSTBTSTBCOMMAND SUMMARY

6 RS-232-InterfaceSelecting the RS-232C InterfaceConfiguring the RS-232C InterfaceUsing RS-232Typical RS-232C DialogRS-232 Commands

COMM RS CONFCOMM PROMPTCOMM RS SRQ

5-945-95

5-965-975-985-99

5-1015-1025-103

5-1045-1055-1065-1075-1085-1095-110

6-16-16-26-3

6-46-66-7

Appendix 1 - Sequence File Commands

Page 7: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

1 [ GENERAL INFORMATION

PURPOSE

UNPACKING ANDINSPECTION

This manual is intended to provide instruction regarding thesetup and operation of the covered instruments. In addition, itdescribes the theory of operation and presents other informationregarding its functioning and application.

The Service Documentation, packaged separately, should beconsulted for the schematics, parts lists and other materials thatapply to the specific version of the instrument as identified byits ECO number.

LeCroy recommends that the shipment be thoroughly inspectedimmediately upon delivery. All material in the container(s)should be checked against the enclosed Packing List and short-ages reported to the carrier promptly. If the shipment is dam-aged in any way, please notify the carrier. If the damage is dueto mishandling during shipment, you must file a damage claimwith the carrier. The LeCroy field service office can help withthis. LeCroy tests all products before shipping and packages allproducts in containers designed to protect against reasonableshock and vibration.

WARRANTY LeCroy warrants its instrument products to operate within speci-fications under normal use and service for a period of one yearfrom the date of shipment. Component products, replacementparts, and repairs are warranted for 90 days. This warranty ex-tends only to the original purchaser. Software is thoroughlytested, but is supplied "as is" with no warranty of any kind cov-ering detailed performance. Accessory products not manufac-tured by LeCroy are covered by the original equipment manu-facturers warranty only.

In exercising this warranty, LeCroy will repair or, at its option,replace any product returned to the Customer Service Depart-ment or an authorized service facility within the warranty pe-riod, provided that the warrantor’s examination discloses thatthe product is defective due to workmanship or materials andhas not been caused by misuse, neglect, accident or abnormalconditions or operations.

The purchaser is responsible for the transportation and insur-ance charges arising from the return of products to the servicingfacility. LeCroy will return all in-warranty products with trans-portation prepaid.

This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or im-plied, including but not limited to any implied warranty of mer-chantability, fitness, or adequacy for any particular purpose or

1-1

Page 8: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

General Information

PRODUCT ASSISTANCE

MAINTENANCEAGREEMENTS

DOCUMENTATIONDISCREPANCIES

SOFTWARE LICENSINGAGREEMENT

use. LeCroy shall not be liable for any special, incidental, orconsequential damages, whether in contract, or otherwise.

Answers to questions concerning installation, calibration, anduse of LeCroy equipment are available from the SSD CustomerServices Department, 700 Chestnut Ridge Road, ChestnutRidge, New York 10977-6499, (914) 578-6020, or your localfield service office.

LeCroy offers a selection of customer support services. For ex-ample, Maintenance agreements provide extended warranty thatallows the customer to budget maintenance costs after the initialwarranty has expired. Other services such as installation, train-ing, on-site repair, and addition of engineering improvementsare available through specific Supplemental Support Agreements.Please contact the Customer Service Department or the localfield service office for details.

LeCroy is committed to providing state-of-the-art instrumenta-tion and is continually refining and improving the performanceof its products. While physical modifications can be imple-mented quite rapidly, the corrected documentation frequentlyrequires more time to produce. Consequently, this manual maynot agree in every detail with the accompanying product and theschematics in the Service Documentation. There may be smalldiscrepancies in the values of components for the purposes ofpulse shape, timing, offset, etc., and, occasionally, minor logicchanges. Where any such inconsistencies exist, please be as-sured that the unit is correct and incorporates the most up-to-date circuitry.

Software products are licensed for a single machine. Under thislicense you may:

¯ Copy the software for backup or modification purposes in sup-port of your use of the software on a single machine.

¯ Modify the software and/or merge it into another program foryour use on a single machine.

¯ Transfer the software and the license to another party if theother party accepts the terms of this agreement and you relin-

1-2

Page 9: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

General Information 1

quish all copies, whether in printed or machine readable form,including all modified or merged versions.

SERVICE PROCEDURE Products requiring maintenance should be returned to anauthorized service facility. If under warranty, LeCroy will repairor replace the product at no charge. The purchaser is only re-sponsible for the transportation charges arising from return ofthe goods to the service facility.

For all LeCroy products in need of repair after the warrantyperiod, the customer must provide a Purchase Order Numberbefore any inoperative equipment can be repaired or replaced.The customer will be billed for the parts and labor for the re-pair as well as for shipping.

All products returned for repair should be identified by themodel and serial numbers and include a description of the de-fect or failure, name and phone number of the user. In thecase of products returned, a Return Authorization Number isrequired and may be obtained by contacting the Customer Serv-ice Department in your area.

New York Corporate HeadquartersEast Coast Regional Service

New Hampshire

Virginia

New Mexico

California

(914) 425-2000 or(914) 578-6059

(603) 627-6303

(703) 368-1033

(505) 293-8100

(415) 463-2600

1-3

Page 10: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

2 I PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

9112 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION

9112

9100/CP

9100/SW

9100GPIB2

The LeCroy 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator (AFG) is a highperformance ATE or benchtop instrument which can generateeither standard or user-defined, complex waveforms with unpar-alleled point-to-point resolution. It is fully programmable viaeither GPIB or RS-232. Waveform creation and editing soft-ware is offered for PC-DOS compatible computers.The 9112 Series instruments are part of a complete customwaveform generation system. The main products which supportthis system are listed below.

ARBITRARY FUNCTION GENERATOR MAINFRAME. Thisis the basic mainframe unit. The standard unit is remotely pro-grammable over GPIB. This unit has local control ONLYthrough use of the optional 9100/CP control panel.

9100 HAND-HELD CONTROL PANEL. This is the controlpanel which adds local operation of all features of the 9112 withthe exception of waveform file creation, editing and download-ing. Metal brackets are included to allow control panel to befree-standing or attached to side of the 9112 mainframe.

The EASYWAVE Operating Manual covers the following prod-ucts

EASYWAVE® SOFTWARE. An optional software package forPC-DOS compatible computers which provides easy waveformcreation and editing. This includes creating waveforms from asimple waveform element library, equations, tabular editing, ordirect acquisition from the LeCroy 9400, 9420 & 9450 Oscillo-scopes. Without this package waveform files must be created ona host computer either with a text editor or a user written pro-gram and then downloaded either over GPIB or RS-232.

IBM PC COMPATIBLE GPIB CARD AND SOFTWARE. ThisGPIB card and driver software are required to run EASYWAVEfrom a IBM XT/AT compatible. Manuals are included with thisfor detailed operation of GPIB without EASYWAVE.

Operation of the 9112 AFG via the EASYWAVE software pack-age provides full capability without compromise. All waveformsmay be edited at any time and the 9112 can be operated via afull-screen interface on the host IBM XT/AT.

NOTE: Waveform editing capability has not been provided inthe 9112 Series mainframe.

Some applications may not need to have waveform creation orediting facilities on hand at all times. In these cases, after thewaveforms have been created with EASYWAVE (or other usersupplied program) and downloaded to the AFG non-volatile

2-1

Page 11: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

9112 WAVEFORMGENERATION CONCEPT

RAM disk the host computer may be disconnected and theAFG can be used as a "custom" waveform generator with allcontrol accessible via the 9100/CP control panel.

Some users may need to use other host computers to operatetheir test systems. In this case the basic waveform shapesneeded for testing may be edited using EASYWAVE and down-loaded into the 9112 or transferred to the test system host com-puter.

The 9112 is a signal source whose output voltage as a functionof time can be programmed via an array of data values andvarious control settings. The instrument generates the waveformby sequentially stepping through the array and outputting a volt-age proportional to each data value for a fixed time interval orsample period (point). Selecting or specifying the contents the data array are performed separately from entering the con-trol settings commands so the user has a great deal of flexibilityin modifying a waveform without having to change its basicshape (the waveform data array).A simple way of thinking about the operation of an AFG isshown in Figure 2.1. Basically, an oscillator clocks a counterwhich in turn advances the address applied to a memory. Thememory data value which is stored in the next sequential loca-tion is then output to the digital-to-analog converter (DAC).Finally the DAC converts the data value to an analog level. Asthe counter steps through the memory addresses, the associateddata values are converted by the DAC. This results in a voltagewaveform being output which is proportional to the data arraywhich resides in the memory.

OSCILLATOR 1--~,L

COUNTER

SIMPLIFIED AFG

RAM

ADDRESS DATA

Figure 2.1

\DAC "~- ~,~ WAVEFORM

J"" OUTPUT

In all sample-based waveform generation systems, remnants ofthe sampling frequency will be present in the output waveform.This will appear, in the frequency domain, as mixing terms ofthe sample rate and the waveform’s fundamental frequency. Inthe time domain, it may be visible as "steps" in the output

2-2

Page 12: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

9112 ARCHITECTURE

waveshape. An external output filter is included with your 9112,which may be used if such harmonic content would be trouble-some in your application. The filter is an 8-pole Butterworthlow pass type, with a cutoff frequency (-3 dB point) 36 MHz. Insertion of this filter will naturally degrade pulse andstep response, but will have the desired smoothing effect onbandwidth-limited waveforms.

NOTE: Only 1 output filter is included with each 9112. Addi-tional filters may be ordered if desired.

The 9112 can emulate standard types of generators without theuse of a host computer to edit the data arrays. The availablestandard waveforms are sine, square, triangle, ramp, pulse andDC.

The 9112 Series mainframe and CP is most easily visualized infour main blocks (Figure 2.2):

1. RAM DISK

2. REMOTE CONTROL

3. CONTROL PANEL

4. WAVEFORM GENERATOR CIRCUIT

2-3

Page 13: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

BATTERIES( REAR PANEL)

EXT TRIG CLK I OUT

350K BYTE CLK 2 OUTNON-VOLATILE

~

STORAGE SYNC

USER DEFINED:~ EXT CLK START

WAVEFORM FILES LeCroy J RS232 GPIB MARKERSETUP FILESSEQUENCE FILES 9100/CP ] CHI OUT

TJ EiE, E’~ CH 2 OUT

El C, CI C’ i-II’~1 I--I I--I I--I 19 MANUAL TRIGi--I El g I:l l’J BNC

RAM DISK 0 CI 0 I.TJ INSTRUMENT WAVEFORM CONNF, r~D ~0 CONTROL GENERATOR,_~ t.._~ E’ r-J ,~I’-I I’~I r-_l ~ r-i

CIRCUITS

IINTERNAL BUS EI’IOI I -12

Figure 2.2

RAM DISK The RAM disk is used for storage of the waveform data arrayswhich are referred to as "waveform files". The RAM disk is350Kbytes of non-volatile storage. All waveform files must bestored in the RAM disk before they can be loaded into thewaveform generator circuit.

Depending on the size of the waveform files and the numberthat are needed on the RAM disk at any one time, all files maybe kept on the RAM disk so they don’t have to be reloadedevery time they need to be generated or when the unit is pow-ered on. Other types of files are used for automating the setupof waveform data and waveform control settings, these are re-ferred to as "sequence files" and "setup files". All standard filehandling commands are available such as delete, directory, etc.For summary of file handling commands see Chapter 5.

2-4

Page 14: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

REMOTE CONTROL

CONTROL PANEL

All functions of the instrument are accessible remotely via eitherGPIB or RS-232. All details of operation over GPIB are lo-cated in Chapter 5 of this manual. The command syntax andoperation over GPIB and RS-232 are identical with a few ex-ceptions outlined in the section covering RS-232.

Once arbitrary waveform files are transferred into the RAM diskvia the GPIB interface or the RS-232, all other operations canbe controlled locally from the control panel. This includes load-ing waveforms from the RAM disk into the Waveform Generat-ing Circuit, setting all waveform attributes and executing "se-quence files" and "setup files" as well as accessing status sum-maries. Operation of all standard functions are supported viathe 9100/CP control panel. For complete instructions on oper-ating via the control panel refer to Chapter 4.

WAVEFORMGENERATOR CIRCUIT This is the block which takes waveform files and converts them

into analog waveforms. A brief block diagram is shown in Fig-ures 2.3 and 2.4. The five main subcircuits are the trigger, timebase, waveform memory, digital-to-analog converter, and signalconditioner.

An understanding of some of the internal architecture will helpexplain the response of the analog output to various combina-tions of output amplitude and offset while in different operatingmodes.

Amplitude always refers to the peak-to-peak swing at the outputfor a digital change of 4095 counts in a waveform data field.Offset is the voltage level that will be output when a digital valueequal to the ZREF level is generated by a waveform file.

NOTE: Once the appropriate waveform data values are calcu-lated, they should be shifted into the upper 12 bits of the 16-bitdata words sent to the 9112’s RAM. Only the upper 12 bits ofthe words in the 9112’s operating memory are sent to theDAC’s. The lower 4 bits are available on the digital word out-puts.

If there is a conflict in requested amplitude and offset settingsthe 9112 always tries to achieve the requested amplitude in pref-erence to the requested offset. A general guideline relatingmaximum offset to requested amplitude is that you can alwaysachieve an offset equal to 1/2 the requested amplitude as longas all points of the waveform are within the -4-5 V limitation(assuming a 50 ~ load) of the output amplifier.

2-5

Page 15: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

JEXT TRIG/GATE [INPUT [

MANUAL OR COMMAND

MARKER

IOUTPUT

TRIGGER

I EXT CLK

JINPUT b

JEKTREP I .INPUT

J IMASTER CLOCKSYNTHESIZER --ImHz - 2OOMHz

TIMEBASE

START

MASTERCLOCKGATE

STOP

END OFWAVEFORM

G-IOI2

Figure 2.3

2-6

Page 16: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

CLOCK

END OFWAVEFORM

WAVEFORMMEMORY

.WAVEFORM

MEMORY

sER

ALIZER

I OFFSET

DIGITALWORD OUT SIGNAL

CONDITIONERS

DAC

.~

CH I

)

DtGITALWORD OUT

5011

8-1013-12

Figure 2.4

2-?

Page 17: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

LeCroy 9112 ARBITRARY FUNCTION GENERATOR

B-IO04-12

Figure 2.5

2-8

Page 18: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

product Description 2

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS,CONNECTIONS ANDINDICATORS

[] Power Switch: Rocker switch that turns AC power on or off.LED in status section indicates power is on.

[] Manual Trigger Pushbutton: Will cause a single shot trig-ger when pressed, if it is enabled via trigger source selection. Ifheld down it will cause continuous triggers at a rate of about 2per second.

[]Armed LED: Indicates trigger is armed, that is, if a triggeris received on an enabled trigger source the waveform will beoutput. Meaningful only if 9112 is in a triggered mode (notfree-running) and a waveform is active.

[] GPIB Status LED’s SRQ: Indicates 9112 is asserting SERVICE REQUEST

Talk: Indicates 9112 is currently addressed to talk.

Listen: Indicates 9112 is currently addressed to listen.

Local: When lit means the 9112 is being controlled via the9100/CP control panel or RS-232. When off, the 9112 is capa-ble of responding to commands from GPIB. The 9112 is in thelocal state on power-up.

[] STATUS LED’s B~lttery Low LED: Indicates when the RAM disk back-upbattery is low. When this LED is lit, the batteries should be re-placed.

Test Fault LED - If this indicator is lit steadily, it indicates thatthe 9112’s CPU has stopped functioning. If it is flashing, it indi-cates that self-test or calibration has failed.

Self-Test LED: The self-test is performed automatically onpower-up, and can be invoked at any other time via GPIB,RS-232 or the 9100/CP. The self-test LED is lit when theModel 9112 is performing the self-test.

Power: Indicates that power is on.

[’~’lWaveform Output Status LED’s

CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE: Indicates waveform being output onChannel 1. When blinking an overload has occurred. The over-load can be cleared by re-enabling the channel’s output.CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE: Indicates waveform being output onChannel 2. When blinking an overload has occurred.

CHANNEL 1 or CHANNEL 2 INVERT LED’s: The waveformfor the indicated channel is inverted.

2-9

Page 19: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

Input~Output Connectors liS]Keypad Connector: The cable from the 9100/CP plugs intothis connector.

[]CHANNEL 1 Waveform Output: BNC connector forChannel 1 output. Active when CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE LED islit.

[]CHANNEL 2 Waveform Output: BNC connector forChannel 2 output. Active when the CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE LEDis lit.

[]TRIGGER/GATE: External trigger or gate input connector.Acts as trigger or gate input depending on trigger mode selected.

[] MARKER: Timing pulse which can be programmed to beoutput in the range from 2 to 1/2 million clock cycles after re-ceipt of trigger. The marker output is functional only in Single,Burst, or Recurrent trigger modes. Note that if the Marker delayis programmed for a number greater than the sum of the triggerdelay and the total number of points that will be output (includ-ing segment repetitions, links, and waveform repetitions), noMarker pulse will be generated. Also, at clock rates greater than10 MHz, the width of the Marker pulse (nominally 100 nsec)may be reduced if it is positioned within 100 nsec of the lastpoint generated.

[’T] START: Timing pulse which is output at the beginning ofeach iteration of the waveform.

[] SYNC: Is a pulse that occurs approximately 1 clock cycleafter receipt of trigger and is synchronized to the selected clocksource.

[] Digital Outputs: Two 34-pin fiat cable connectors. Eachcontains a 16-bit data word corresponding to the analog outputvalue for its respective channel and a clock signal.

2-10

Page 20: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

REAR PANEL CONNECTIONSAND CONTROLS

®

@

®

®®

©

Figure 2.6

[] Batteries: This compartment contains 2 Lith-ium batteries for powering the RAM disk mem-ory. The compartment door is easily opened forbattery replacement.

[] GPIB Connector: Standard IEEE-488connector.[] RS-232: 25 pin DIN (panel mounted fe-male) connector.

[] GPIB Address Configuration Dip-switch:The right-most 5 switches (bits) are used set the address. Note the LSB is marked andis the rightmost bit. A switch in the up posi-tion is a 1 and in the down position a 0. Thesixth switch from the right is used to specifywhether the 9112 powers up with the GPIB orRS-232 as the default active interface. Thelast 2 switches are unused.

[] RS-232 Configuration Dip-switch:This switch is used to set up the RS-232parameters.

[] AC Power Connector: IEC type.

[] 115 V FUSE: Used only for 115 Voperation. 3A fuse required.

[] 220 V Fuse: Used only for 220Voperation. 1.5A fuse required.

[] Line Voltage Selector Switch: Thisswitch should be properly set before in-serting line cord into power receptacle.Lower position for 220 and upper posi-tion for 115.

2-11

Page 21: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

[] CLOCK IN REF: A 4 MHz reference oscillator, amplitudebetween 1 and 4 V p-p, may be used as the 9112 referenceoscillator instead of the internal crystal. It is input here and thesignal is AC coupled.

[] CLOCK IN EXT: The internal synthesizer may be by-passed altogether and the 9112 can be driven by a clock signalthat is input to this connector. This input is selected via theCLOCK_SOURCE command.

[] CLOCK OUT 1: Ungated clock output, at 2 times thepoint output rate for single channel waveforms, or 4 times thepoint rate for dual channel waveforms.

[] CLOCK OUT 2: Gated clock output for master-slave op-eration.

2-12

Page 22: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

SPECIFICATIONS

D.C. Output Characteristics

Dynamic Characteristics:

Number of Output Channels: 2

Output Voltage Range: =1=5 V into 50 ~; -4-10 V into >10 kl’lload.

Maximum output current: 4-100 mA

Output impedance: 50 -4- .5 l~

Minimum amplitude range: <100 ttV full-scale into 50

D.C. Output Accuracy: (at calibrate time): 0.5% FSR into50.00 ~ for FS_~500 mV1.0% FSR -4- 500 ttV into 50.0 l~ for FS <500 mV. (Accuracygradually drops from .5% to 1% at 50 mV FS)0.3% FSR into user supplied load of from 49 l~ to 1 MI~ forFSR ~10% of Max Output Voltage Range.

Output Temperature Coefficient: <0.01% of FSR/ °C typical

Waveform DAC Resolution: 12 bits

Gain Adjust Resolution: 0.05% Amplitude

Offset Adjust Resolution: 0.05% FSR

Waveform DAC Int. Non-Linearity: -4-0.03% typ.; -I-0.05%max

Waveform DAC Diff. Non-Linearity: -i-0.75 lsb typ; -4-1 lsbmax, monotonic

Offset Adjust Range: -4- Full Scale Amplitude (wrt midscale ofwaveform); must be within Output Voltage range.

Risetime/Falltime: < 8 nsec (5.5 nsec typ)Overshoot and Ringing: __~ 5%, typically 2%Total Harmonic Distortion: __~ -65 dBc, f < 200 kHz

(1 V rms into 50 ~) _ -55 dBc, f < 1 MHz__~ -45 dBc, f < 5 MHz

Spurious and non-harmonic distortion:<-65 dBc, f __~ 1 MHz< -60 dBc, f > 1 MHzexcluding the band within1 kHz of carrier

Settling Time: < 20 nsec to 1% typical,50 nsec max.

Interchannei Crosstalk: < 0.05%, tested with both channels at10 V amplitude.Channel-to-Channel Analog Delay Difference: < 3 nsec

2-13

Page 23: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

Low Pass Output Filter:

Noise

Timebase

Waveform Memory

Analog OutputProtection

Digitial OutputSpecification

Corner Frquency (-3 dB): 36 MHzSource Impedance: 50Filter Input Impedance: 50 l’lFilter Load Impedance: 50 l~Passband Flatness:

DC to 10 MHz: 0.1 dB10 MHz to 25 MHz: 0.4 dB

Attenuation at 50 MHz: > 40 dBMaximum Applied DC Voltage: 7 VMaximum AC Signal Amplitude: 12 V p-pInput and Output Connectors: BNC female

Signal to Noise Ratio (non-coherent): >70 dB rmsP-P Noise: < 0.1% FS + < 2 mV excluding glitch

Max Glitch Energy: (5 X 10-11 V-sec) times FS

Max. Waveform Point Rate: 50 Mpoints/sec each channelRange: 20 nsec/point to 100 sec/pointResolution: .035%Accuracy: <: 5 ppm at achievable setpoints, 23o C,115 VAC/60 Hz, after 30 minute warmupStability: <0.5 ppm per °C

Fast Memory Length: 64 Kpoints single channelWaveform Length Resolution: single channel: 4 pt blocksdual channel: 2 pt blocks

Protected against application of up to 4-40 V DC

Output Channels: 2 channels with Channel 1 data correspond-ing to the channel 1 analog output. Channel 2 digital data cor-responds to the channel 2 analog output. Digitial data is normal-ized so that a data value of 4095 (FFF18) on the 12 msbs the digital word (D15-D4) corresponds to maximum analog am-plitude and a data value of 0(0001e) on the 12 msbs of the digi-tal word corresponds to the minimum analog output.

Maximum Digital Pattern Length: Same as for Analog Output

Digital Outputs per Channel: 16 data lines, clock, 17 grounds

Maximum Data Output Rates: (Identical to 9112 analog sam-ple rate) Single or Dual channel operation: 50 Msamples/sec(20 nsec per word)

2-14

Page 24: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

Timing: (All outputs unloaded)Digitial Clock to Analog Output: Clock preceeds the Analog out-put by 1 clock period +16 nsec -4-3 nsecDigital Clock to Digital Data: 4 nsec typicalClock Duty Cycle: 40% min, 60% maxSetup Time Provided: 15 nsec min at 50 Megawords/second

typically setup time = (sample period)- (holdtime)

Data to Data Skew Time: 4-0.8 nsec max within each channel’sdata wordHold time Provided: 2 nsec rain, 4 nsec typChannel to Channel Skew:

Clock: 4- 0.8 nsec maxData to Data Skew Time: 4-1.6 nsec for anydata line to data line

Risetime: 5 nsec max (20% - 80%)Falltime: 3.5 nsec max (20% - 80%)Both risetime and fallttme measured 20%-80% after 3 fl of Twist ’N Flatcable. Load at termination is two LS TTL data inputs plus a probe loadingof 5 k ~ in parallel with 2 pF

Logic Levels:V(high) min: +2.7 V at +1 V(low) max: +0.75 V at -3.2 Absolute max applied voltages: +5.5 v, -0.5 V

2-15

Page 25: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

TTL Output ConnectorConfiguration Same pattern for channel 1 and channel 2

All TrL outputs are single ended, back terminted in 75 £1

Indicators

Pin#

Ground 1Ground 3Ground 5Ground 7Ground 9Ground 11Ground 13Ground 15Ground 17Ground 19Ground 21Ground 23Ground 25Ground 27Ground 29Ground 31Ground 33

2 Clock4 DO (LSB)6 D18 D2

10 D312 D4 (LSB of 12 bit waveform)14 D516 D618 D720 D822 D924 D1026 Dll28 D1230 D1332 D14

34 D15 (MSB)

NOTE 1: Suggested connector type 3-M Part No. 3421-7034 orequiv. (34 pin . 1"X.1" flat cable socket connector with strainrelief). 1 required for each channel’s output.NOTE 2: Normal flat cables may be utilized, however best per-formance may be achieved with Twisted Pair Flat cable such asSpectra Strip #455-248-34 (17 pair Twist N’ Flat, 28 AWG).

Power on LED - ON when power is applied to the instrumentTrigger Armed LED - ON when awaiting a trigger signal.

Waveform Active LED’s: Channel 1: ON when Channel 1 isturned on; Chan 2: ON when Channel 2 is turned on.GPIB: Talk LED - ON when the instrument is in the talk

mode.

Listen LED - ON when the instrument is in the listenmode.SRQ LED - ON when the SRQ line is asserted and theinstrument is awaiting action from a GPIB controller.

Remote - This word is spelled out in the hand-heldcontrol panel display whenever the instrument is put intoremote by a GPIB controller.

2-16

Page 26: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

Rear PanelConnectors andSwitches

Waveform Creationand Editing

Local LED - Indicates when the instrument is in theLOCAL mode and the hand-held control panel is op-erative. When it is not ON, the instrument is in theGPIB remote state.

Self Test LED - ON when a self test or calibrate is inprogress

Test Fault LED - Flashes for 10 seconds when a selftest or calibrate determines there is a fault or steady ONin the event of a microprocessor failure.

Battery Low LED - ON when the RAM Disk memoryback-up battery is too low.

Channel 1, Invert LED - ON when Ch 1 output is in-verted.

Channel 2, Invert LED - ON when Ch 2 output is in-verted.

Connectors: GPIB: IEEE 488-1978 compatible; RS-232 Port:DB 25 S Power Connector

Switches: GPIB Address Switch; RS-232 Port ConfigurationSwitch, Line voltage selector and fuses

LeCroy’s EASYWAVE® software package is available for PC-DOS compatible computers*. It provides for waveform creationand editing in a menu driven environment. Waveform creationcan be accomplished by any of the following methods:

1. Equation entry

2. Selecting and combining simple waveform elements.

3. Waveforms can be acquired over the GPIB from theLeCroy 9400 Series Digital Oscilloscopes and then ed-ited.

Editing may be accomplished as follows:

1. Modifying individual points from the keyboard.

2. Modifying the equation describing the waveform.

3. Deleting, moving and rescaling blocks of data.

* Minimum hardware configuration of host computer 640KRAM, 10 Mbyte Hard Disk, Graphics (CGA,HGA, or EGA)Display and National Instruments PC2A GPIB Interface Card.

2-17

Page 27: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description

Instrument Control

General

Standard Accessories

Ordering Information

Other GPIB Compatible Controllers: Waveforms can be cre-ated and edited on other controllers using user supplied soft-ware.

PC-DOS Compatibles: The same software package used forwaveform editing also can be used for controlling the 9112.

Local Control Panel: Once the waveforms have been loaded toRAM Disk, an optional, detachable control panel with a fourline LCD display may be used for controlling the 9112.

Other GPIB or RS-232 Compatible Controllers: Other com-puters or terminals may be used to control the instrument usingthe remote commands.

GPIB Interface Functions: IEEE 488-1978 compatible. SH1,AH1, TS, TE0, L3, LEO, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT1, CO

GPIB DMA Rates: Typically >200 kbytes/sec

RS-23ZC: Implemented as data communications Equipment(DCE)Baud Rates: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.Data Bits: 7 or 8,Stop Bits: 1 or 2.Parity: None, Even, or Odd.Protocol: Full Duplex, Xon/Xoff (DC1/DC3) handshake.Data Formats: #I Arbitrary length ASCII #L ASCII HEX "00"to "FF" (double the length of internally stored binary data files)

Commands: Full Conversational same as OPIB plus: RS_SRQ,Define character equivalent to SRQ in GPIB. Default is "Bell",ESC commands ECHO on/off Trig remote/local

Temperature Range: 15o C. to 350 C., full specification; 0° C.to 40o C., operating

Humidity: 40o C., 10% to 95% relative, non-condensing.

Power: 115/220 +/- 20% VAC,47-63 Hz. approximately147 watts

Size: 5-1/4" H X 19" WX 15" D.

Weight: 26 lbs. (approximately)

1 each Operator’s Manual1 each 36 MHz Low-Pass Output Filter

9112 Arbitrary Function Generator

2-18

Page 28: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Product Description 2

Optional Accessories 9100/CP9100/EC9112/OM9112/SM9100/SW9100 GPIB2

DC/GPIB2

Detachable Hand-held Control Panel6’ Extender Cable (Control Panel)Operator’s ManualService ManualEASYWAVE SoftwareGPIB interface card and software (NationalInstruments PCII Card and GPIB-PC Software)GPIB Cable, 2 meters

Filter/36 MHz Additional 36 MHz Low-Pass Output Filter

EASYWAVE® is a registered trademark of LeCroy CorpIBMXT/AT® is a registered trademark ofInternational Business Machines Corp.

2-19

Page 29: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

3 [OPERATIONS

PREPARATION FOR USE

OPERATINGENVIRONMENT

Voltage Selection andFuse Check

Power Cable

GPIB Address Selection

The Model 9112 should be operated only within the followingenvironmental limits:

Temperature: 15°C to 35° C, in spec; 0°C to 40° C, inoperating.

Humidity: 40° C, 10% to 95% relative, non-condensingSpecifications are rated from +15° C to +35° C.

The Model 9112 has been designed to operate from either a115 V or 220 V nominal power source. On the rear panel ofthe instrument, a switch permits user selection of either voltage.Also on the rear panel, separate fuses are provided for eachvoltage.

Prior to powering up the Model 9112, make certain that thevoltage selector switch is set to whichever of those two voltagescorresponds to the available power supply and that the fuse forthat voltage is intact and properly installed.

CAUTION: The Model 9112 will fail to operate and could bedamaged if plugged into a voltage other than that which thevoltage selector switch on the rear panel is set. Thus, correctline voltage selection MUST be made before plugging theinstrument in or turning it on.

The Model 9112 has been designed to operate from asingle-phase power source with one of the current-carryingconductors (neutral conductor) at ground (earth) potential.Operation from power sources in which both current-carryingconductors are live with respect to ground (such asphase-to-phase on a tri-phase system) is not recommended.

The instrument is provided with a three-wire electrical cablecontaining a three-terminal polarized plug for line voltage andsafety ground connection. The plug’s ground terminal isconnected directly to the frame of the unit. For adequateprotection against electrical hazard, this plug must be insertedinto a mating outlet containing a safety ground contact.

The Model 9112’s 8-segment GPIB address switch is located onthe instrument’s rear panel. Segments 1 and 2 are unused.Segment 3 selects the communication source. A "1" selectsGPIB and "0" selects RS-232.

Segments 4 through 8 on the switch are used for GPIB addressselection as shown in Figure 3.1.

3-1

Page 30: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

I

11rl ncI nclnrl rl 01684 2 1For Example:0 0 0 0 0=0

00001=110001=17

1 1 1 1 1=31

Valid

1 = GPIB, 0 = RS-232GPIB Address

Binary Equivalent

Not a valid addressautomatically defaults to 1The default addressTyploal AddressNot a valid addressautomatically defaults to I

Addresses are I through 30

Figure 3.1GPIB Selection and Addresses

RS-232 Switch Setup

Power-On Procedure

Refer to Chapter 6.

As described in the preceding sections, the first steps inoperating the Model 9112 is to be sure that it is properlyconnected to line power, that it is properly fused, and that theselector switch on the rear panel is set to the same voltage asline power.

Once those steps are complete, press the power switch (in theupper right corner of the front panel) to the ON position. Thepower LED in the status section will light to indicate that poweris on.

Also on will be the SELF-TEST light in the STATUS rectangle,below and to the left of the power switch. This light indicatesthat the instrument is undergoing calibration, which is part ofself-test. When the calibration is complete the self-test LED willno longer be lit.

After calibration, the instrument initializes all control settings,which takes several seconds. During this time the LOCAL LED

3-2

Page 31: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

will be on. The remote interfaces are ignored until initializationis complete, to avoid any possible conflicts. After initializationthe message "LECROY 9112" appears on the 9100/CP, if it isattached. If a GPIB controller places the instrument in theREMOTE state during initialization, this will be recognized atthe end of initialization. If the communications source isRS-232, a prompt "AFG\>" is sent over RS-232 at the end ofinitialization.

The instrument is now ready to use in its power-up mode. Allinstrument settings will be at their default values and only thePOWER and LOCAL LED’s will remain lit (the Model 9112powers up in LOCAL mode, which means it is at that point setto be controlled by the 9100/CP).

When settings are changed to meet the needs of specificoperations, and/or if appropriate commands are given to invokeREMOTE (computer) control of the instrument, differentfront-panel LED’s will light up accordingly.

OPERATING THE 9112 In the following sections the general format of remotecommands will be given to show how certain operations areinvoked. The argument descriptor will often be shown as theargument name or explanation enclosed in angular brackets.For example:

Command: CLOCK_PERIOD,<desired period>;

The type of argument is not to be entered literally when thecommand is used. The angular brackets and text enclosedshould be replaced by the properly formatted argument inaccordance with the rules specified in Chapter 5. The argumentis typically a number with a unit appended to it with noembedded spaces.

All commands except for those that transfer files into and outof the 9112 can also be given using the 9100/CP via itsmenu-driven command entry. See Chapter 4 for the 9100/CPmenu description.

STANDARD FUNCTIONS Standard functions may be generated with the 9112 using the9100/CP or by command over the bus without loading or usingany waveform files. The standard function modes completelyemulate the usual function generator operation by automaticallygenerating the waveforms needed in the waveform memory. Inall these modes the user simply enters the parameters needed

3-3

Page 32: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

ARBITRARY WAVEFORMSAND FILE CONVENTIONS

(for example, frequency and phase for sine generation) and therest is done automatically.

The standard functions are accessed under the FUNC mainmenu key on the 9100/CP. For detailed instructions on themenu driven operation of the standard functions see Chapter 4.

To operate standard functions under remote control, first sendthe command which forces the 9112 into the particular standardfunction mode (a single word command which is usually thename of the function, e.g., sine, pulse, ..). The function willthen be output. For a detailed explanation of the operation ofall related commands see Chapter 5.

Listed below are the commands for setting up dual channel,1 MHz sine waves with 20° phase difference between Channel 1and Channel 2.

SINE;SINE_MODE,DUAL;SINE_FREQUENCY, 1 MHZ;SINE_CH2_PHASE,20;

In standard function modes the clock is set automatically andcannot be controlled independently as with arbitrary functions.For this reason all clock related commands are disabled when ina standard function mode. When using a 9100/CP, if anexternal clock reference is needed in standard function mode itmust be selected when in arbitrary mode and then it will beactive when using standard functions. It cannot be selectedwhen in standard mode.

The LeCroy EASYWAVE software running on an IBM XT/ATcomputer is the recommended method of creating andtransferring arbitrary waveform files to the 9112. The nextsection carefully explains how to format and transfer waveformfiles to the 9112, and Chapter 5 summarizes all the commandsand formats used. All arbitrary waveforms are handled as filesin the 9112. Once the files exist on the 9112 RAM disk allcontrol can be accomplished via the 9100/CP control panel.

All files in the AFG have an extension which is necessary andsignificant. Below is a summary of the different types of filesyou will encounter. The file name, represented by xxxxxxxx, isthe alphanumeric name that the user gives when creating thefile.

xxxxxxxx.WAV - SINGLE CHANNEL WAVEFORM FILEContains the data to generate a single channel waveform. Mayonly be output on Channel 1.

3-4

Page 33: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3xxxxxxxx.WAD - DUAL CHANNEL WAVEFORM FILEContains the data to generate a dual channel waveform.

xxxxxxxx.SET- SETTINGS FILE Used to automaticallyestablish all settings of the 9112 in conjunction with the SETUPcommand. The LEARN command automatically generates asetup file.

xxxxxxxx.SEQ - SEQUENCE FILE Used to contain asequence of 9112 commands that may be executedautomatically by giving the SEQUENCE command. Thiscommand is most necessary when defining a complex waveformusing the LINK command.

Defining an ArbitraryWaveform in Termsof a Waveform File

\

Two types of waveform file formats are used by the 9112, onefor single channel waveforms and one for dual channelwaveforms. Both single channel and dual channel waveform filescontain a single sequence of 16-bit words of which the mostsignificant 12 bits define the waveform data array to begenerated. The 4 least significant bits of the 16-bit data wordsare available on the digitial word outputs, but are not sent tothe 9112’s DACs. The words should be UNSIGNED, in otherwords range from 0 to 65535. In general, when you calculateyour waveform using your computer you will probably be usingfloating point numbers to represent the voltage values which youwish to generate. In order to convert these into 16-bit waveformdata values and maintain the maximum amplitude resolution youshoql~ in most cases, scale your waveform so that the minimum

0 /ACalue c~responds to 0 and your maximum value corresponds to

k655351 )"Th~"6asic constraints on the waveform files are:

1. The maximum number of points is 32768.

2. The number of words must be a multiple of 4. This is dueto a hardware constraint in the waveform memory.

3. The number of words must be greater than or equal to 4 fora waveform file that will not be "linked" with otherwaveform files when loaded into the WAVEFORMGENERATOR CIRCUIT from the RAM DISK. (see page3-9 for an explanation of waveform file linking.)

4. The number of points must be greater than or equal to 36for a single channel waveform file that will be "linked" withother single channel waveform files. Dual channel files thatare to be "linked" must contain at least 18 points perchannel.

3-5

Page 34: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

5. Minimum data value is 0. Maximum data value is 65535.

The single channel waveform simply contains a series of wordsin the exact order in which you want them to be generated. Thesingle channel waveform will always be output on Channel 1.The format is given below where the index specifies the interval(point in time) during which that value will be generated. Thewaveform file contains N data words.

a(1) a(2) a(3) a(4) a(5) a(6) a(N)

The dual channel waveform file consists of interleaved pairs ofdata words which will be routed to Channel 1 (a) and Channel2(b). Below we designate words for Channel 1 as a and wordsfor Channel 2 as b and the index specifies the interval duringwhich that value will be generated starting with 1. Thiswaveform file contains 2N data words and when run will resultin N points being output on channel 1 and N points beingoutput on Channel 2.

a(1) b(1) a(2) b(2) a(3) b(3) a(4) b(4) .......

TRANSFERRING WAVEFORMDATA FILES INTO THEAFG RAM DISK VIA GPIB

NOTE: If you are using the EASYWAVE Program to create andtransfer your waveform files you may skip this section.

After you have defined the data array which will become yourwaveform file, you need to transfer it to the 9112. We do thiswith the STORE command.

First send the command to transfer the file.

For single channel waveforms: STORE filename.wav

For dual channel waveforms: STORE filename.wad

NOTE: The extension on the waveform is significant and letsthe 9112 know what type of waveform will be contained in thefile. Filename represents the name by which you will refer tothe waveform file.

Next, send the file. The stream of bytes that you send consistsof either a single block of words or a series of blocks. If the fileis being sent in multiple blocks EOI must be asserted only withthe last byte of the last block to indicate the end of the file.

The waveform files may be transferred to the 9112 in either oftwo block formats; binary (called #9 format) or hex-ASCII(called #L format). Each individual block consists of a blockpreamble, a count (the number of data bytes (2 X the number

3-6

Page 35: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

of data words) in #9 and the number of data values in the #Lcase). Below are the block formats for the binary and hexASCII file block transfers. In the table, each row corresponds toa byte sent over the GPIB to the 9112.

3-7

Page 36: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

FOR BINARY TRANSFER:Byte Number

123-11

12131415

Byte Value

# (ASCII #)9 (ASCII 9)9 ASCII characters containing the block’sbytecount (2 times the word count, i.e., 2N foran N point waveform)<data word 1, low byte><data word 1, high byte><data word 2, low byte><data word 2, high byte>

2N+10 <data word N, low byte>2N+l 1 <data word N, high byte> (with

EOI, if last block)*

*EOI, if sent, must be sent with the last byte. EOI terminatesthe file transfer. If EOI is not sent, the 9112 will accept anotherblock as part of the same file. The last block of a file transfermust be sent with EOI on the last byte.

FOR HEX ASCII TRANSFER:

Byte Number

1234567891011121314

Byte Value

# (ASCII #)L (ASCII uppercase L)<value count, 4th hex digit, most significant >*<value count, 3rd hex digit>*<value count, 2nd hex digit>*<value count, 1st hex digit, least significant>*<data word 1, 4th hex digit, most significant><data word 1, 3rd hex digit><data word 1, 2nd hex digit><data word 1, 1st hex digit, least significant><data word 2, 4th hex digit><data word 2, 3rd hex digit><data word 2, 2nd hex digit><data word 2, 1st hex digit>

4N+3 <data word N, 4th hex digit>

3-8

Page 37: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

4N+4 <data word N, 3rd hex digit>4N+5 <data word N, 2nd hex digit>4N+6 <data word N, 1st hex digit> (with EOI,

if last block) *

¯ Value count is the number of data values you are sendingover in this block. In this hex ascii representation there are 4bytes per data value.

¯ *EOI, if sent, must be sent with the last byte. EOI terminatesthe file transfer. If EOI is not sent, the 9112 will accept anotherblock as part of the same file. The last block of a file transfermust be sent with EOI on the last byte.

NOTE: When transferring files over the RS-232 interface, thelast byte must be followed by the character defined byCOMM RS CONF as simulating EOI; see Chapter 6.

LOADING THE WAVEFORMFILES FROM RAM DISKINTO THE WAVEFORMGENERATOR CIRCUIT The simplest type of waveform that we can generate is based on

a single waveform file. To generate the waveform described by asingle waveform file, simply load it and go by issuing thefollowing commands:

LOAD filename.ext; GO;

Where ext is either WAV or WAD, if single or dual channelrespectively.

NOTE: The commands shown in this section are remotecommands valid over GPIB or RS-232. All functions are alsoaccessible from the 9100/CP. Operation with the 9100/CP iscovered in Chapter 4.

If you are using only simple waveforms composed of singlewaveform file, skip the rest of this section of the operationprocedure. The procedure for building up more complicatedwaveforms which utilize the linking and looping capabilities ofthe 9112 will now be described.

The waveform data memory length of the 9112 is 64 Kwords.This means that if you are using only a single waveform file, theupper limit on a single channel waveform is 64 Kpoints and fora dual channel waveform is 32 Kpoints per channel. The 9112provides a way to effectively generate much longer waveforms ifany parts of the waveform are repetitive in nature.

You may link together waveform files when loading into thewaveform memory to define what can be thought of as awaveform program. Lets look at an example. Suppose you want

3-9

Page 38: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

to generate the waveform shown in Figure 3.2. It consists ofseveral pieces each of which are repeated several times:

1 sine cycle1 DC section4 sine cycles2 DC sections2 Gaussian pulses6 DC sections

WA VEFORMLOAD - SINE 1

--LINK- T COMP 1

~ LINK - SINE 4

[~-LINK- T COMP 2I/IIFLINK- GAUS 2

ill-LINK - T COMP 6

II1

REPETITIONS

Figure 3.2

SINE %T COMP - OV (10 POINTS)GAUSJ~

M- 1005

You could simply generate a single data file which contained allthe data as a single array, or we provide another method whichwill use less waveform memory. We may define three waveformfiles as follows:

GAUS.WAV contains 1 Gaussian pulseSINE.WAV contains 1 cycle of a sine waveTCOMP.WAV contains a constant data array

3-10

Page 39: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

We can then load the waveform using the following sequence ofcommands:

LOAD SINE.WAV, 1;LINK TCOMP.WAV, 1;LINK SINE.WAV,4;LINK TCOMP.WAV,2;LINK GAUS.WAV,2;LINK TCOMP.WAV,6;GO; (when you want to start it running)

The load command always comes first and tells the 9112 thatwe are loading a new waveform into the waveform memory. Inthis waveform the 9112 will generate one repetition ofSINE.WAV, then one repetition of TCOMP.WAV, then fourrepetitions of SINE.WAV, then two repetitions ofTCOMP.WAV, then two repetitions of GAUS.WAV, and finallysix repetitions of TCOMP.WAV. When the waveform is loadedin this manner, as a multi-file waveform, the amount ofwaveform data memory used is conserved since each unique filehas to reside in the waveform memory only once. Therefore,the amount of waveform memory used by this waveform is thesum only of the number of data values in the three files.

Main constraints in making linked waveforms:

1. Minimum size of each file must be 36 points, as opposed to4 for a single file waveform.

2. A Maximum of 1 Load + 681 sequential Link commandscan be used to generate a linked waveform.

3. The maximum number for the repetition argument in theload or link is 4095.

The LINK command also accepts an additional argument. Thepurpose of this argument is to permit each trigger to causeoutput of different waveform segments. The format of thecommand is:

LINK argl [arg2] [arg3];

where optional items are contained in brackets and items to bereplaced are in lower case.

argl: filename to link, with extension, such as A.WAD.

arg2: Number between 1 and 4095 inclusive representing thesegment repetition count. Default if not present is 1.

arg3: WAIT.

The "WAIT" argument, if present, tells the 9112 to wait fortrigger before executing this segment. More precisely, it tells the

3-11

Page 40: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

CONTROL SETTINGSSUMMARY(amplitude, clock .... )

Channel Parameter Settings

Timebase Settings

Trigger Settings

AFG to act as if the entire waveform ended with the segmentbefore this one, and this segment is the first one in the nextwaveform repetition. A detailed discussion of the effect of thisargument will be found under "Specifying the Trigger Mode",page 3-14.

Specifying the 9112 control settings gives the user control overthe various waveform characteristics. All attributes can becontrolled from the Control Panel as well as by GPIBcommands. The values of the settings determine when aparticular waveform data point will be output and at whatvoltage level. The settings can be grouped into the followingmajor categories shown below.

Settings which control the signal conditioning applied to theChannel 1 and Channel 2 signals.

CHI_AMPLITUDECH1 OFFSETCH 1-ZERO REFCH 1-INVEI~TCH1 OUTPUTm

CH1 LOAD COMPCH I-DIGITAL_WORD

CH2 AMPLITUDECH2 OFFSETCH2 ZERO REFCH2-INVEI~TCH2-OUTPUTCH2 LOAD COMPCH2-DIGIT~,L WORD

Settings that affect the main clock, which determines the datapoint period (i.e., determines rate at which the waveform isoutput).

CLOCK RATECLOCK PERIODCLOCK SOURCECLOCK REFERENCECLOCK_LEVELCLOCK SLOPECLOCK MODE

Settings that affect when and how the waveform is triggered.

TRIG MODETRIG DELAYTRIG_SOURCETRIG ARM SOURCETRIG-SLOPETRIG LEVELMARKER DELAYDELAY I~ODE

3-12

Page 41: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

SPECIFYING HOW THEDATA VALUES ARECONVERTED TOVOLTAGE LEVELS

A detailed explanation of every command is contained in thecommand reference in Chapter 5.

AMPLITUDE, OFFSET AND ZERO REF determine the outputvoltage as a function of data point va~e, V(n) where n is thedata value.

NOTE: Unless "Load Compensation’ is enabled, all voltages arefor the output terminated in 50 12. If the output load is a highimpedance, then all voltages at the output will be 2 × higherthan set. For more information see "CHI_LOAD_COMP"command description in Chapter 5.

The AMPLITUDE command sets the full scale voltage range,that is, the voltage swing obtained when the data point valuechanges from 0 to 4095. For example the commands to setboth channel amplitudes to 2.3 V would be:

CH1 AMPLITUDE 2.3V;mCH2 AMPLITUDE 2.3V;B

ZERO REF sets the data value whose output voltage does notchangewhen the amplitude is changed (think of it as the fixedpoint or baseline). This is also the data value which whenoutput from the AFG will correspond to the offset voltage. Thisvalue must fall between 0 and 4095 but need not be constrainedonly to integer values (2047.5 is a valid value and is the defaultvalue for this parameter). The commands to set zero_ref to (for unipolar positive operation) are:

CH1 ZERO REF 0;CH2 ZERO REF 0;

For unipolar positive operation zref is typically set to 0. Forunipolar negative operation zref is typically set to 4095.

NOTE: For an autoscaled waveform (i.e., one that isnormalized so that the maximum value is 4095 and minimum isO) to be generated symmetrically about 0 V ZREF should be setto 2047.5, and the offset should be set to 0 V.

OFFSET sets the output voltage obtained when the data pointvalue is equal to zref. The following commands set the offseton channel 1 to 1 V and the offset on channel 2 to 2 V.

CH1 OFFSET 1V;CH2 OFFSET 2V;

3-13

Page 42: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

SPECIFYING THE TIMEPER POINT

SPECIFYING THETRIGGER MODE

To summarize:

V(n=zref) = VoffsetV(4095) - V(O) = Vamplitude

so for a general data value n:

V(n) = Voffset + Vamplitude*(n-zref)/4095

Where

V(n) is the voltage output for data value n. n is thewaveform data value between 0 and 4095. Voffset is theprogrammed offset voltage. Vamplitude is the selectedamplitude voltage. Zref is the zero reference point.

NOTE: Once the appropriate waveform data values arecalculated, they should be shifted into the upper 12 bits of the16-bit data words sent to the 9112"s RAM. Only the upper 12bits of the words in the 9112’s operatin8 memory are sent tothe DAC’s. All sixteen bits are available on the disital wordoutputs.

The clock period attribute controls the amount of time eachwaveform point is output.

CLOCK_PERIOD < time value with optional units>;

The TRIG MODE specifies the overall running mode of thewaveforrn.-The 9112 has five different trigger modes:

1. Continuous - On receipt of the GO command the generatoroutputs the loaded waveform. When it reaches the end of thewaveform it immediately starts over at the beginning with nointerruption between the last point and the first point. Thegenerator will continue to cycle the loaded waveform untilreceipt of an ABORT or STOP. A pulse will be output from theSTART output at the beginning of each cycle. The SYNC andMARKER outputs are not available in this mode.

COMMAND: TRIG MODE CONTINUOUS;

2. Single (triggered) - This is a single sweep triggered mode.In general, for each receipt of a trigger the generator will outputone sweep of the loaded waveform.

On receipt of a GO command the generator waits for anARM command (if ARM_SOURCE=BUS) before proceeds. Usually (and by default) ARM_SOURCE=AUTO,in which case no ARM is needed. It then waits for receiptof a trigger from any one of the enabled sources. While

3-14

Page 43: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

waiting for a trigger, the first data point in the waveform isbeing output. Upon receipt of a trigger a pulse is outputfrom the SYNC connector (the output is actually issued onthe first positive clock edge after receipt of trigger). Thenthe generator waits a programmed number of clock cyclescalled the TRIG DELAY. At the end of the TRIG DELAYa pulse is genera’ted at the START output on the frontpanel. The generator then outputs the loaded waveformand stops output, holding the last point ifARM SOURCE=BUS. In this case, the output will remain atthe last point until an ARM command is received. After theARM command is detected, the output changes to the firstpoint of the waveform, and remains in that state until atrigger is received. If, however, ARM_SOURCE=AUTO (thedefault condition), the last point will only be held for therearm time and then the output will switch back to the firstpoint automatically, and the unit will be ready to acceptanother trigger.

Command: TRIG MODE SINGLE;u

3. Burst (triggered) - This is a multiple sweep triggered mode.It operates identically to the SINGLE mode except that it willoutput the programmed number of sweeps of the waveforminstead of just a single sweep.

Command: TRIG_MODE BURST,<number of sweeps>;

4. Recurrent - This is basically a BURST mode with automaticretriggering. It is a free running mode, not a triggered mode.When the GO command is given in this mode the waveform willbe cycled until an ABORT or STOP is received. Although it isfree running it is identical in operation to the Burst mode withtwo exceptions: (1) no trigger is needed to initiate thewaveform, and (2) the generator is automatically rearmed andretriggered after every BURST of waveform sweeps.

Command: TRIG_MODE RECURRENT,<sweeps/cycle>

5. Gate - Gate is a combination of the triggered modes and thecontinuous mode. The starting of the waveform is identical tothe triggered modes. The waveform then cycles in a mannersimilar to Continuous. When the external GATE input becomesinactive the generator will complete the current sweep of thewaveform, stop output, rearm and await the next transition ofthe Gate input to the active state. The ARM feature is notactive (always set to ARM_SOURCE=AUTO).

Command: TRIG MODE GATEI

The "WAIT" argument, if appended to a LINK command, tellsthe 9112 to wait for trigger before executing the segment. More

3-15

Page 44: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

precisely, it tells the AFG to act as if the entire waveformended with the segment before this one, and this segment is thefirst one in the next waveform repetition. This providesinteresting effects, depending on which trigger mode is selected.It is meant to be used in single trigger mode. The effects are asfollows:

TriggerMode (TMOD) EffectSingle A new trigger is required to generate each segment (or

group of segments beginning with one) which has beenlinked with "wait". For example, consider:LOAD A.WAV,1; LINK B.WAV,2,WAIT; LINKC.WAV, 2; LINK D.WAV, 3, WAIT; The first triggerwill generate only A.WAV once, because B.WAV waslinked with "wait". The second trigger will generate tworepetitions of B.WAV and two repetitions of C.WAV,because C.WAV was linked without "wait". The thirdtrigger will generate three repetitions of D.WAV. Eachtrigger generates appropriate timing outputs: SYNC,START and MARKER, if possible. The programmedtrigger delay occurs following each trigger.

Continuous: The generated waveform is not affected by linkswith wait, since continuous mode never waits for trigger.However, a START pulse is generated at eachend-of-waveform mark, i.e., at the beginning of eachsegment linked with "wait", as well as at the beginningof the first (LOADed) segment. Given the exampleabove, a START pulse would be generated at thebeginning of A.WAV and at the beginning of B.WAV’sfirst repetition and at the beginning of D.WAV’s firstrepetition. The programmed trigger delay has no effectas usual.

Gated: In this mode, waveform generation is halted at the firstend-of-waveform after the GATE signal goes false.Each link with "wait" introduces an end-of-waveformmark. Thus, to continue the example above, in gatemode generation may stop just before A.WAV (asnormal), or before B.WAV’s first repetition or beforeD.WAV’s first repetition, whichever comes first after thegate goes false. When the gate goes true again, outputwill begin with the appropriate segment, either A.WAVor B.WAV or D.WAV, after the programmed triggerdelay.

Burst: Burst is very similar to single, except single stops atevery end-of-wave, while burst counts the specifiednumber of end-of-waves and then stops. So, using the

3-16

Page 45: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

TIMING OUTPUT SIGNALRELATIONSHIPS

example from "single" mode once again, in TMODBURST,3 each trigger would cause the 9112 to wait theprogrammed trigger delay and then produce A.WAVfollowed by two repetitions of B.WAV, two repetitionsof C.WAV, and three repetitions of D.WAV. The threeend-of-waveform marks are just before B.WAV, justbefore D.WAV and just before A.WAV.TMOD BURST, 1 is exactly equivalent to single triggermode, see above. An interesting mode is to give a burstcount that is neither 1 nor the number of end-of-wavemarkers in the waveform. For example, TMOD BURST2 would cause A.WAV, B.WAV and C.WAV to beproduced by the first trigger (following GO); D.WAVand A.WAV to be produced by the second trigger;B.WAV, C.WAV and D.WAV to be produced by thethird trigger, etc.

Recurrent: Recurrent is the same as burst, with an automatictrigger immediately occurring whenever the system waitsfor trigger.

In summary, in single trigger mode this feature permits the 9112to produce a sequence of different waveforms in response to aseries of asynchronous external triggers, with as little as 70 nsecdelay from trigger to the next waveform. The trigger may alsobe supplied by the TRIG command, but the response will beslower. In either case, the response is much faster than could beachieved if a sequence of LOAD and LINK commands had tobe executed to change the waveform. In other trigger modes,other possibly useful effects are obtained.

The following description of timing relationships details theoperation of the SYNC, START and MARKER outputs, howthey relate to the waveform output(s), and how they changewith the selected triggering mode. For purposes of thisdiscussion, the unit of timing will be the waveform point (i.e.,clock period), in order to provide an understanding of how thetiming of these signals may vary with the clock. At high clockrates (in excess of 10 MHz), the signal timing may appearsomewhat different due to asynchronous (e.g., propagation)delays. Unless otherwise noted, MARKER output timing is thesame as START output timing, but is programmed using theMARKER DELAY command rather than the TRIGGERDELAY command. Timing will also vary depending on whethera single-channel or dual-channel waveform is being generated.Delay values for dual-channel operation will be given inparentheses 0 following the single-channel value.

3-17

Page 46: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

Single - After the GO command is issued, the first point(s) the waveform will be present at the analog output(s). The AFGthen waits for a trigger from any enabled source. The firsttrigger received will be synchronized to the generator’s internalclock, and a SYNC pulse will be output. The actual time fromthe recognition of a trigger to the SYNC output will vary fromone trigger to the next because of the synchronization process.The START pulse occurs [TRIGGER DELAY- 1 (1/2)] pointsafter the SYNC. The synchronization delay is also included inthe TRIGGER DELAY, so that the actual time from a trigger tothe START will never be longer than the programmed delayvalue, but may be shorter by 1/2 (1/4) point. In any event, theSTART pulse occurs 1 point before the analog output(s) makesthe transition from the first point to the second. At the end ofthe waveform, if the auto-arm function is enabled (the defaultcondition), the last point of the waveform is held for 5 1/2(3 1/4) points. If bus arming is selected, then the last point held until 4 1/2 (2 1/4) points after the arm command received. This is the trigger re-arm time, following which theanalog output(s) returns to the first point of the waveform andthe unit awaits the next trigger. Figure 3.4 shows an overview ofsingle trigger mode timing relationships. A more detailed view isshown in Figure 3.8.

Burst - Same as for single mode. See Figure 3.5.

Continuous - The SYNC and MARKER outputs are generatedonce in response to the GO command. Their relationship to thewaveform output(s) is the same as in single mode. The STARTpulse is actually generated near the end of any given waveformcycle (which, given the nature of continuous operation, roughlycorresponds to the beginning of the next cycle). The absolutetiming from the START output to the first waveform point willvary depending on the number of points contained in thewaveform file. Since the intent of the START pulse in thismode is merely as a convenient triggering signal for anoscilloscope, the exact timing relationship is non-critical. SeeFigure 3.3.

Gated - In this mode, the GO command again puts the firstpoint(s) of the waveform at the analog output(s). The and MARKER outputs are generated in response to the gatesignal’s transition from the "closed" state to the "open" state(as determined by the TRIGGER SLOPE and TRIGGERLEVEL settings), in the same manner as in single trigger mode.Transitions on the analog output are delayed by TRIGGERDELAY, as in single mode. The START pulses are generatednear the end of each cycle within the gate signal’s active interval

3-18

Page 47: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

as in continuous mode. The number of repetitions is determinedby the duration of the true state of the gate input, and oneSTART pulse will occur for each repetition. The waveform willcontinue to its natural completion after the gate "closes", andthe analog output(s) will make the transition from the last pointback to the first point after the trigger re-arm time of 4 1/2(2 1/4) points. The AFG then waits for the next transition the gate signal. See Figure 3.7 for an overview of timingrelationships in gate mode.

Recurrent - In recurrent mode, trigger delay is defined as thetime from the end of the natural duration of the last point ofone occurrence of the waveform (i.e., 1 clock period after thetransition to the last point) to the beginning of the naturalduration of the first point of the next occurrence (i.e., 1 cyclebefore the transition to the second point). Our discussion of thisoperating mode will therefore commence with the end of awaveform occurrence. The last point is held for its normalduration plus 4 1/2 (2 1/4) points while the trigger re-arms.The output(s) then make makes the transition to the first point.The SYNC output occurs 8 (4 1/2) points after the transition the last point (i.e., 7 (3 1/2) points after the last point’s normalduration). The START pulse occurs TRIGGER DELAY pointsafter the normal duration of the last point (or TRIGGERDELAY + 1 (1/2) points after the transition to the last point).The first point of the waveform is held for one period after theleading edge of the START pulse. Figure 3.6 shows an overviewof recurrent mode timing. More detail in shown in Figure 3.9.

3-19

Page 48: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

CONTINUOUS MODE OPERATION

This mode is used to loop on the programmed waveform in a continuous and uninterrupted manner (i.e., the first point isgenerated immediately after the last point. For example, this mode would be used to generate a continuous wave sine).

CH 1 OUTPUT,,.i,,,o**oo,,.,,.,,.*.

/

START OUTPUT .............. ~.

SYNC OUTPUT NOT USED IN CONTINUOUS

MARKER OUTPUT NOT USED IN CONTINUOUS

~oo °°°° °°l

[]

Figure 3.3

3-20

Page 49: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

TRIGGERED SINGLE MODE OPERATIONIn this mode each trigger causes a single repetition of the programmed waveform to be generated. Initial and final outputlevels are set by first and last points of waveform respectively.

WAITING FOR ARM COMMAND ~._~M COMMAND~ HOLDING LAST POINT IN WAVE J.)

CH 1 OUTPUT iWAfI1NG FOR IRIGGER !.., .A.UT..? AR. ,M ........................................... I WAmNG FOR ~RIGGERHOLDING FIRSI POINT : :

PROG/’~AMMEDWAV~ORM

TRIGGER INPUT fl ::

SYNCOUTPUT

STARTOUTPUT

MARKER OUTPUT

[~ MARKER DELAY

nJ-!

Figure 3.4

3-21

Page 50: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

TRIGGERED BURST MODE OPERATION

In this mode each trigger causes a set number of repetitions of the programmed waveform to be generated (3 in the examplebelow). Initial and final output tevels are set by first and last points of waveform respectively.

CH 1 OUTPUT

WANING FO{~ TRIGGER

HOLD FIRST POINTIN WAVE

TRIGGER INPUT

SYNC OUTPUT

START OUTPUT

MARKER OUTPUT

d.,

n

! AUTO ARMi .....

H3 CYCLES OF PROGRAMMED WAVEFORMS

Figure 3.5

3-22

Page 51: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

RECURRENT MODE OPERATION

A free running auto-triggered mode. The end of one cycle of the programmed waveform synchronously triggers the nextcycle. In this mode, a programmable trigger delay separates the cycles. By changing the trigger delay the rap rate can bevaried independent of the clock rate thus keeping the shape constant. Note that the trigger delay time includes the auto arminterval. All timing outputs are available in this mode.

°°°°°CH 1 OUTPUT

SYNC OUTPUT

STA.TOU~UT ..... I-t

MARKER OUTPUT

F]

Figure 3.6

3-23

Page 52: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

GATED MODE OPERATION

Program waveform to output continuously while the gate is aative. After gate becomes inactive the current cycle of the wave-form is completed and the trigger is ready to be re-armed. Typically the trigger delay should be set to minimum, but is pro-grammable for additional flexibility.

CH 1 OUTPUT

WAITING FOR TRIGGER

HOLD FIRST POINTIN WAVE

GATEINPUT

SYNC OUTPUT

START OUTPUT

MARKER OUTPUT

MARKER DELAY

WAmNG FORGATE

Figure 3.7

3-24

Page 53: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

9112 SINGLE MODE TIMING

CH1 OUTPUT

SYNC

START

III

WAIT FOR TRIGGER

RE-ARM TIMEi.__._~JSAME AS ABOVE

SYNC TO STARTSINGLE = TRIGGER DELAY - 1

IDUAL = TRIGGER DELAY- 1/2

MINIMUM PROGRAMMABLETRIGGER DELAYSINGLE = 2DUAL = 1

Figure 3.8

3-25

Page 54: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

9112 RECURRENT MODE TIMING

CH 1 OUTPUT

SYNC

START

I RE-ARM TIMESINGLE = 5-1/2

I DUAL = 3-1/4

LAST POINT

j LAST POINT TO SYNCSINGLE = 8

I DUAL =4-1/2 II LAST POINT TO START = TRIGGER DELAY + 1

MINIMUM PROGRAMMABLETRIGGER DELAYSINGLE = 8DUAL = 4

Figure 3.9

3-26

Page 55: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

SPECIFYING THETRIGGER DELAY The trigger delay is used in Single, Burst and Recurrent modes.

It determines the amount of delay between receipt of trigger andthe start of waveform output. In Recurrent, it is the number ofpoints between the end of the last burst of sweeps and thebeginning of the next.

Command: TRIG_DELAY <desired trigger delay>

SPECIFYING EXTERNALTRIGGERING To trigger the 9112 on an external signal it should be input to

the trigger/gate input BNC on the front panel. The inputimpedance is 50 fl. The trigger source called external must beselected to be on. The TRIG SLOPE and TRIG LEVELcommands are used to set the point at which the9112 willtrigger on the applied signal. For most casesTRIG ARM SOURCE should be set to AUTO so that thetriggerwill be armed automatically after each waveform sweep.

The following command sequence would be used to triggerexternally at a 1 V level on the positive slope with the triggerbeing automatically armed.

TRIG_SOURCE, EXTERNAL,ON;TRIG_LEVEL, 1V;TRIG_SLOPE, POSITIVE;TRIG_ARM_SOURCE,AUTO;

DISCONNECTING THEOUTPUT WHILE THEGENERATOR IS RUNNING The output of either channel may be disconnected without

interrupting waveform generation at the other output or at thetiming outputs. The commands to do this are:

CHI_OUTPUT,<on or off>; CH20UTPUT,<on or off>;

INVERTING CHANNEL 1OR 2 Either channel may be inverted without changing the waveform

file. The waveform will be inverted about the zref point. Thecommands to do this are:

CHI_INVERT,<on or off>; CH2_INVERT,<on or off>;

3-27

Page 56: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

USING AN EXTERNALCLOCK REFERENCE

USING AN EXTERNALCLOCK SOURCE

SYNCHRONIZINGWITH ANOTHER9112 AFG

An external 4 MHz reference oscillator (amplitude between and 4 V p-p) may be used as the timebase reference instead ofthe internal 4 MHz crystal. This is useful if the 9112 needs tobe phase-locked to a system reference. The clock period is stillcontrolled by the generator; only the reference is changed. Thecommand to select the reference source is:

CLOCK REFERENCE,<external or internal>;

When using Standard Functions, see page 3-3: STANDARDFUNCTIONS.

An external clock source may be used to drive the generator.When the external clock source is selected, the clock period iscontrolled completely by the external source and the clockperiod command has no effect. When generating single-channelwaveforms, the external clock may be operated at frequenciesup to 100 MHz, a’nd the point output rate will be 1/2 theexternal clock frequency. For dual-channel waveforms, thepoint output rate is 1/4 of the external clock frequency, but theclock may be run at frequencies up to 200 MHz. The clocksource is selected with the following command:

CLOCK SOURCE,<external or internal>;

CLOCK_MODE,SLAVE is used to synchronize one 9112 AFGto another. The unit placed in SLAVE mode uses the signal onthe CLOCK IN(EXT) rear panel BNC connector as its clock.This signal is assumed to come from the CLOCK OUT 2 rearpanel BNC connector of another 9112 which is inCLOCK MODE MASTER.u

NOTE: CLOCK OUT 1 provides continuous output at twice theclock frequency for single channel waveforms, or 4 times theclock frequency for dual channel waveforms. Only CLOCK OUT2 is suitable for MASTER~SLAVE operation.

Upon entering slave mode, CLOCKSOURCE defaults toEXTERNAL, CLOCK SLOPE defaults to positive, andCLOCK LEVEL defaults to -200 mV. The previous settings arerestored-upon receipt of a CLOCKMODE, MASTERcommand. While in the slave mode, the CLOCK SOURCE andCLOCK_SLOPE cannot be changed. CLOCK_LEVEL can bechanged. Also, while a unit is in slave mode, TRIG MODEsettings have no effect. The trigger delay is controlled by the

3-28

Page 57: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations 3

STARTING AND STOPPINGTHE WAVEFORM

absence of clock pulses from the master 9112. Trigger settingsentered while in SLAVE mode will correctly take effect whenthe clock mode is changed to MASTER. Other commands thathave no effect in SLAVE mode are: CRAT, CPER, MDEL,DMOD.

To use two 9112s in master/slave operation, do the following:

1. Set one of the 9112s to clock mode slave and connect acable from the master’s CLOCK OUT 2 to the slave’sCLOCK IN (EXT.).

2. LOAD and LINK the desired waveforms on both 9112s.

3. Issue "GO;" to the slave.

4. Issue "GO;" to the master.

NOTE: Steps 3 and 4 must be done in order. Any time themaster aborts waveform generation, whether because of anABORT command or because of a change of trigger settings,etc., both master and slave must be aborted and GO’s issued inthe proper order. Failure to issue GO to the slave first while themaster is still stopped will result in loss of synchronization.

The START, SYNC and MARKER outputs of the master unitmay be used, those of the slave unit are disabled.

Selection of the clock operating mode is accomplished with thefollowing command:

CLOCK_MODE, <master or slave>;

After loading an arbitrary waveform the waveform is initiated bygiving the GO command.

GO;

Standard function output is initiated immediately upon selectionof the function.

The waveform may be stopped by giving the ABORT command.

ABORT;

When the waveform is aborted all outputs are stopped and theChannel 1 and Channel 2 output relays are opened.

3-29

Page 58: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operations

AUTOMATING THE SETUPAND LOADING OFWAVEFORMS Any valid sequence of 9112 commands, with the exception of

file transfer commands or commands that require a response,may be automated by putting them into a sequence file. Thesequence file is sent to the 9112 with the STORE commandusing the #0 block format. See Chapter 5 for details. Alwaysfollow the rules below:

1. Make certain that all commands within a sequence file endwith a semicolon.

2. Always terminate a sequence with the command: END;

3-30

Page 59: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 [CONTROL PANEL OPERATION I

GETTING STARTEDWITH THE 9100/CP

Basic Description The 9100/CP, Figure 4.1, is an external panel that allows auser, without computer intervention, to control all aspects of theModel 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator, except storing(downloading) of files and recall (uploading) of files.

.eCroy 9100/CP ][]

I-J[ImCSITI ¢OMMCe l~l.rrEJ

FUNC R~Gli VIEW BACK

Ci4AN I I 2 3

I TGR tl¢ HI KHZ

CHANZ 4 5 6

[ACTIVE

Mill

,

mV V

CLOCK 7 6 9

’tRIO 1-) J 0 "

IT.t~Uj[ABORTENTER

s~Tus LOCAL O0

]NEXT SEO iS/TUP l

LOAD LINK LEARN

B-944

Model 9100/CP Control PanelFigure 4.1

Functions that can be performed using the 9100/CP include:¯ Selecting, loading, linking, and executing arbitrary

(user-defined) waveforms that have been previouslydownloaded from a computer via the GPIB or RS-232CInterface to the Model 9112’s RAM disk storage memory.

¯ Selecting and executing any of the six standard waveforms(sine, square, triangle, ramp, pulse, and DC) incorporatedinto the Model 9112.

¯ Implementing ON/OFF selections for Channel 1 and Channel2 output modes; and controlling the amplitude, invert, offset,load compensation and zero reference for each channel.

4-1

Page 60: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Connecting the 9100/CPto the Arbitrary FunctionGenerator

¯ Selecting internal or external clock source or clock referenceand determining rate or period for internal clock; thresholdlevel and slope for external clock.

¯ Choosing trigger mode; arming and firing the trigger viakeyboard command or by selecting automatic trigger armingand alternate trigger sources.

¯ Learning in memory, and executing complete setup files, eachconsisting of a complete set of channel, timebase, and triggercommands.

¯ Selecting and executing setup files created via computer andpreviously downloaded to the Model 9112.

¯ Selecting and executing sequence files created via computerand previously downloaded to the Model 9112. Consisting ofvalid GPIB commands, a sequence file can contain nestedsequence and setup files as well as additional commands toload, link, and execute waveforms.

¯ Returning control of the Arbitrary Function Generator from acomputer (remote mode) to the 9100/CP keyboard (localmode) if local lockout has not been invoked via GPIB.

Compact and light in weight, the 9100/CP can be easily handheld while being used. It also comes with a bracket with whichit can be mounted on a benchtop, any other convenient surface,or the Model 9112 itself.

Connected to the Arbitrary Function Generator by means of a6-ft coiled cable that plugs into the front of the Model 9112,the control panel is readily detachable. Optional 6-ft extendercables are available, and as many as four extenders may bechained together for additional length.

The main features of the 9100/CP are an LCD screen thatdisplays functional menus and prompts operator instructions tothe Model 9112 and a multi-function keyboard that serves asthe mechanism by which those instructions are input.

The cable attached to the 9100/CP plugs directly into theconnector within the KEYPAD rectangle in the lower rightcorner of the Model 9112 front panel.

The Model 9112 can be under local (9100/CP) control computer (remote) control. The default, on power-up, is localcontrol mode.

4-2

Page 61: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

LCD Display

Keyboard

LeCROY 9112

GPIB ADDR = 1VER 1.00

Power-up display shows the software version (VER)number in use and the GPIB Address of the Model 9112

Figure 4.2

In the event that the Arbitrary Function Generator is alreadypowered up and operating in remote mode when the 9100/CP isconnected, the 9112 automatically returns to Local Mode andsends the "power up screen" to the 9100/CP.

If the Model 9112 is in local lockout mode, however, pressingthe [LOCAL] key will result in the 9100/CP screen sayingLOCKOUT. When that happens, the 9100/CP will beinoperative; use EASYWAVE, GPIB, or RS-232 control to exitthe lockout mode, and then press [LOCAL] to continue.

The 9100/CP display shows information in pages containing asmany as four lines of data or prompts. In this regard, a # signat the bottom of the screen view indicates that the menu orinformation sequence you are looking at has at least one morepage. Some operations require several pages.

functions ifbeing white

Four of theother keys:

The 9100/CP keyboard consists of 32 keys. To confirm thatcontact has been made, each key gives off an audible signal(beep) upon being pressed.

Twenty-two of the keys have dual functions. A key has twoit contains two sets of identification, the top setletters in a blue rectangle.

keys have functions that set them apart from the

[SHIFT] when pressed immediately prior to pressing any dualfunction key, causes the upper function (blue rectangle) that key to be executed. If a dual function key is pressedwithout the [SHIFT] key being pressed first, the lowerfunction is invoked, After invoking a shifted function, all keysreturn to the unshifted position.

[SHIFT RESET] resets all instrument settings to thepower-up defaults and results in the display shown in Figure4.2.

4-3

Page 62: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

[SHIFT DELETE] can remove a selected arbitrary waveformfile from RAM disk memory. This may be an arbitrarywaveform, setup or sequence file.

[SHIFT CE] stands for CLEAR ENTRY. Pressing this keyclears numeric entries and enables a new entry to be made.

The remainder of the keyboard can be thought of as beingdivided into five main groupings: main menu keys, displaykeys, numeric/units keypad, action keys, information keys.

4-4

Page 63: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Main Menu Keys Keys that call up main menus

LeCroy 91001CP

r---l ,"---II ’,’ ’I It ~--J L----J

C---1 r---’l

’ ’1 II IL------J L-----JF----1 r ---’1

I I ! Ii

L- .--J t~__..Jr- ---I F---7l II I I "~ .... L__.;r---7 r---q

I I II I I II I.... .., k ....J,"---I ,"---I

’I IL.----J L__ _-I

,"--- 7 ,r----]iII Ii i I

F---l, F---l’ ’,’, IL ----J L-- --J

F----1

I

r

Main Menu Keys

Figure 4.3

B-IO09

[FUNC] accesses menus that allow selec-tion of arbitrary waveforms, standardwaveforms, setup, and sequence files.

[CHAN 1] is used to set operating pa-rameters for waveforms generated onChannel 1.

[CHAN 2] is used to set operating parame-ters for waveforms generated on Channel 2.

[CLOCK] is used to enter the generatorclock rate and period. It also allows opera-tor selection of internal or external clocksource or reference use. If an externalclock is used, threshold level and slopemay be user selected.

[TRIG] allows entry of trigger parametersand modes.

4-5

Page 64: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Display Keys Menu Manipulation and Selection:

LeCroy 91001CP

L----J L --- -Jr---7 r---i r---1 r---’I

’ j’___] , ~L __ I. L_--J L---J

,~---~,,~---~,,r---I F---l,, ,, ,I I lI | I II i I Il .... J L__-J I ___J L_._J

F---I r---I [--l r---Ii i I l IL_ __J L-_--J L----J L___J

,~---7F---7 F---I [---II ...... i

L___J L-----J L---J L-----J

r .... ~ r---l ~---~ ~--~I I I II I IL ---J L.---J L___J L___J

, ,’ " ;1 ’,..... L _J’ ~ .....~ L__-

Display Keys

Figure 4.4

B-1007

[F] KEYS: [F1], [F2], [F3] and [F4]are used to perform file selections, exe-cute actions or access submenus for thelines on the display. F1 refers to the firstline of the display and F4 to the fourthline. When used to select a file, an @ willappear after the name of the selected file.

[PAGE]: When a menu contains morethan one page, a # will appear at the endof the fourth line of the display. Pressing[PAGE] will cause the next page of infor-mation to be displayed. When the # doesnot appear this indicates either a singlepage menu or the last page of a multiplepage menu. Pressing the [PAGE] key inthis latter instance returns the menu to thefirst page of the multiple page menu.

[BACK] causes the display to step back-wards one page in a menu. If the display isshowing the first page of a menu, pressing[BACK] will move the screen to the upperlevel menu page from which that first pagewas selected.

4-6

Page 65: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Numeric/Units Keypad Thirteen keys in the center of the keyboard that are used toenter numbers and units:

LeCroy 91001CP

r---1 F---Ii

I I IL_---J L---J

,,----I ,,...--. ~I I i II , I I,.___J L_.-.J L__-J

L___J

,,r---~ Ft~ ,L__-J

,,,r---~, N~ , ,,,’r---~BV1,I.. _ __ ..1

,~---I [-’-7 r---II I I I i iI I I I I IL----J L___J t .... J

Fl r---I f---II I

~,_ - ,..J L---J

r--- -’7 P .... "1

L___’ L__.’F---l’ ¯ I II IL’- .J

N®ND½r---II I

It.__..1

Numeric/Units Keypad

Figure 4.5

B-1006

[NUMERIC] keys and [DECIMAL POINT]key are for those situations in which a par-ticular menu item requires numeric entry.

[-] is for entry of negative values.

[ENTER] is used to terminate numeric en-tries for which units are not required, suchas number of repetitions.

[SHIFT UNITS KEYS] append units tonumeric entries and terminate those en-tries.

To terminate (complete entry of) a nu-meric entry that is dimensionless, key inthe number and then press [ENTER].

When units are added to a number, firstkey in the number. Next press [SHIFT],and then the appropriate units key. Assoon as the units key is pressed, entry iscompleted and [ENTER] need not bepressed.

[SHIFT E] is used to separate the basefrom the exponent when numeric entriesare made using scientific notation.

[SHIFT CE] is used for clearing erroneousentries from the display. This key sequenceclear the entire display and returns to theentry prompt.

4-7

Page 66: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Action Keys

LeCroy 91001CP

r---q

l iiL___J

~ r---7i i

i, i I

L ___-1 L___J

r---] f---~,t I I I[ I I IL---J L___J

i, I I

,,r---?, F---] , ,L---J L---.3

F---] ~---~I jl II ___j L--.J

It---7’,

r- -7

t ,i

L___J

~---], iI

L---J

r---]I i iL---J

r---1I

IL_-_J

F---II

L--.J

JF-’-]I

L____I

N

r-’-~ r---~I I a I

II IL---J L---J

L__Jr---]

I

L---J

r---1I IL---J

r---1I IL---J

r---]I I

IL---a

r--1i IiL-__A

Action KeysFigure 4.6

4-8

Page 67: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Information Keys

[SHIFT SETUP] executes the presentlyselected setup file.

[SHIFT DELETE] can remove a selectedfile from RAM disk memory.[SHIFT RESET] returns the 9112 to itsinitial power-up state, with all settings intheir default states.

Provide the user with the current state of the instrument:

LeCroy 91001CP

F .... l [---I F---II i I I II I I I l IL---.J L---.J L----J

[---I~]~---~---’I 1 ~’,’ ,"t._ __-I - -- L---J

LF~jF---~ F---I f---I, 11_ . I’, , ,.__ L___J L_-_J L___J

F---] r---7 rI I I I II I I I I I "L--..J L---J I .... -I I .... J

,~---I r---n r---l f---]i.... ,,,, ,I I i ~ ,L-...J L___,.I L--.J L---J

,~---7 r---7 r---I f---I’ ’’ ’,’ ’I ’L__.J L___J L.__I .... ;

F---I . .___. ,’ ,,’ ,,’

F~lF---I [---i r--~.... I ’,

I IL__" ’ ’- L ___.J L---J

r" ---1

IL .... .J

Information Keys

Figure 4.7

B-1008

[STATUS] identifies the current generatorstatus for lockout and trigger state, if ap-propriate.

[SHIFT ACTIVE] performs the ActiveFiles function which identifies whichwaveform, setup and sequence files arepresently being executed.

[SHIFT COMM] displays the presentsetup of the communications port (GPIBor RS-232).

[VIEW] All instrument settings are dis-played in 17 menu pages when this key ispressed. As with all other 9100/CP opera-tions, the [PAGE] and [BACK] keys mustbe pressed to move forwards or backwardsthrough the [VIEW] pages.

[SHIFT STB] pressing this key causes astatus byte condition to be displayed inthree lines on the LCD display. Eightmenu pages are used to display the eightstatus bytes.

4-9

Page 68: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation

Terminating (completed)Numeric Entries

UNDERSTANDINGTHE 9100/CP MENUS

Information Menus

Main MenuSelections

To terminate (complete entry of) a numeric entry that dimensionless, key in the number and then press [ENTER].

When units must be changed or added to that number, first keyin the number, Next, press [SHIFT], and then the appropriateunits key. As soon as the units key is pressed, entry iscompleted and [ENTER] need not be pressed.

Taken together, the lines on a 9100/CP page (or series ofpages) comprise a "menu" that tells an operator whatinformation must be understood or what actions must beimplemented to use each portion of the system.

In this regard, each line on a page falls into one of sixcategories. Specifically, a line may be:¯ A filename for operator selection (currently selected file

indicated by *) (Selection indicated by @).

¯ An information item for operator reference (values indicatedby =).

¯ A location at which numeric information is entered ormodified (indicated by [] cursor).

¯ A point at which direct action is initiated (indicated by <).

¯ An entry point for access to a submenu (indicated by : or >).

¯ A value which can be changed by MORE/LESS (indicated by:)

The display keys ([BACK], [PAGE], [F1], [F2], [F3], and[F4]) are used to access menus or parts of menus. And thethirteen keys in the center of the keyboard ([ENTER], [E],[-], [.], the numeric keys, and the units keys) are for enteringinformation required by use of other keys.

As their name implies, the action keys ([TGR], [LOCAL],[T.ARM], [GO], [ABORT], [LOAD], [NEXT], [LINK],[SEQ], [LEARN] and [SETUP]) initiate actions, for the mostpart without use of menu listings.

Pressing the [STATUS], [ACTIVE], [COMM], [VIEW], or[STB] key has no effect on the operation of (or actionsimposed on) the Arbitrary Function Generator. These keysdisplay information menus consisting entirely of listings that canbe used for reference purposes in taking other action.

The five main menu keys ([FUNC], [CHAN 1], [CHAN 2],[CLOCK] and [TRIG]), on the other hand, use menus and

4-10

Page 69: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

submenus extensively. Pressing any of these keys results in a4-line listing of different selection categories from which achoice must be made to proceed.

Each line in a main menu listing is accessed or implemented bypressing one of the [F] keys at the top of the keyboard, with[F1] accessing the first line, [F2] the second line, [F3] thethird line, and [F4] the fourth line. So when you press [F3],you access the parameter named by line 3 on the display.

Alternatively, pressing an [F] key may result in display of asubmenu from which additional [F] key selection may berequired.

[F1 ][F2][F3][F4]

ARBITRAR’~STANDARD>

SETUP>SEQUENCE>

Main Menu that results frompresslng the [Func] key

Figure 4.8

S

Pressing the [FUNC] key, for example, will result in a menu offile types. That menu is shown in Figure 4.8.

Line 1 is ARBITRARY, so pressing [F1] will therefore access asubmenu for selection of arbitrary waveforms. Similarly, pressing[F2] will access a submenu for selection of standard waveforms,[F3] for setup files, and [F4] for sequence files.

In other instances, [F] key selections allow you to look upcurrent parameter settings and then to change those settings asrequired. An example of this can be seen by pressing the[CLOCK] key, an action which produces a main menu listing inwhich line 1 is clock rate, line 2 is clock period, line 3 isthreshold level for an external clock source, and line 4 is aselection of internal or external source.

The special symbols <, :, and [] (cursor) act as questionprompts as shown in Table 4.1.

4-11

Page 70: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

>

<

#

R

S

W

[]

Table 4.1

Special 91001CP Display Symbols

means go to next submenu for this function usingappropriate [F] key

means use IF] key to do this function ortoggle value

means value or parameter shown is current valuewhich may be changed by either more/less oraccessing the next menu

means that a particular file is currently selectedmeans that there are additional submenus ordisplays at this menu level

means running. The 91 i2 is active either becausea waveform is being output or a sequence orsetup file in process.means stopped. No wave output or no sequenceor setup in process

means wait for trigger. When this symbol appearsafter the name of a waveform segment in a list-ing of the contents of control memory, it meansthat the generator will wait for a trigger beforeoutputting that segment.

the cursor acts as a prompt for numeric entries

NOTE: Informational massages and error messagesgenerally do not use any special display symbols except= which Is used literally.

Toggled MenuEntries As described above, line 4 of the main menu displayed after

pressing [CLOCK] is an immediate action prompt. That linecan have one of only two entries: CLOCK SRC< INT (internalclock source) or CLOCK SRC< EXT (external clock source).The clock source is listed on line 4, so repeatedly pressing the[F4] key will "toggle" line 4 from CLOCK SRC< INT toCLOCK SRC< EXT and back again.

Not all such prompts represent INT/EXT toggles. Others includeOFF/ON, POS/NEG, and SING/DUAL. Each toggled [F] keyoperation will be described on the following pages.

4-12

Page 71: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Parameter/DeltaSubmenus " Starting with a main menu, pressing an [F] key will in many

instances result in a parameter/delta submenu for the selectionon the line number corresponding to that key. Theparameter/delta submenu format is shown in Figure 4.9.

[F1 ][F2]

[F3]

[F4]

PARAMETER NAME: (VALUE)DELTA > (VALUE)MORE<

LESS <

Parameter/delta sub-menu format

Figure 4.9

Pressing [F2] three times after the display in Figure 4.8appears, for example, will produce a submenu in which the fourlines are FREQ, DELTA, MORE, and LESS. The specificparameter in that instance is the frequency of square waves.This is depicted in Figure 4.10.

[F1 ][F2][F3][F4]

[F1][F2]

[F3][F4]

FUNC

ARBITRARY>STANDARD >

SETUP>SEQUENCE>

SINE >

SQUARE>

TRIANGLE >RAMP> #S

[F21

SQU_MODE< SINGFREQUENCY>

C1 START>C2 REL ST> SQRS

I[F1]

[F2][F3][F4]

FREQ:DELTA>

MORE<

LESS<

Accessing the parameter/deltasub-menu for square wavesFigure 4.10

SQRS

The operations and displays pertinent to a parameter/deltasub-menu are summarized in Table 4.2

4-13

Page 72: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Press

[F1](PARAMETER NAME)

[F2I(DELTA)

[F3](MORE)

IF4](LESS)

NOTE:

Table 4.2Parameter/Delta Submenu Operations

ResultingScreen Display

2-Une submenu appears,saying: (PARAMETER NAME)=NEW(PARAMETER NAME) l-)oursor

2-11ne 8ubmenu appears, saying:DELTA=NEWDELTA l-lcursor

Parameter/delta menu remainson screen and Is updated.

Parameter/delta menu remainson screen and 18 updated.

Explanation

Current value* of parameter Islisted on line. Enter desired newvalue of parameter by using numericand units keys If required. An [F]is pot neoe.ssary t9 us.e in thissuDmenu. Ae you Key Jn your entry, Itwill appear on line 3. Terminateentry, and parameter/delta menuwill reappear showing the newparameter value. * *

Current delta* 18 displayed on line 1.Enter desired new delta by usingnumeric keys (F key required). you key in the new delta, it willappear on line 3. Terminate entry,and parameter/delta menu willreappear showing the new dare. * *

Increments line 1 parameter valueupwards by the absolute value ofdelta.Increments line 1 parameter valuedownwards by the absolute value ofdelta.

* Present value Is the value most recently entered. Thiswill be the default value if no setup file has been Initiatedand if no other values have been entered.

* * See section earlier In this chapter for Instructions onTerminating Numeric Entries (page 4-10).

To illustrate the use of Table 4.2, press [SHIFT] and then[RESET]. This will restore the instrument to its power-up state,and in the process restore all parameters to default values.

After you press [RESET], the screen will prompt, "are yousure". Pressing the [F3] (yes) response will cause the screen blank, after which the screen shown in Figure 4.2 will appear.Press [CHAN 1] when that happens, and the first page of theChannel 1 main menu will appear, Figure 4.11.

4-14

Page 73: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

[F1]

[F2][F3]

[F4]

CH1 AMP>OFFSET >

ZREF >

OUTPUT EN <OFF #S

Channel 1 Main Menu First PageFigure 4.11

Changing Amplitude Value

To determine the current value of amplitude settings, you haveto access line 1, where CH1 AMP stands for Channel 1amplitude. Pressing IF1] when Figure 4.11 is displayed willresult in the screen changing to the parameter/delta submenushown in Figure 4.12.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

AM~.I-I (current value)DELTA >(current value)MORE <LESS < C1 S

Channel Amplitude Submenu Display

Fisure 4.12

Note the cursor before the value. A new amplitude value can beentered simply by entering the new first digit. The menu ofFigure 4.13 will be deployed and the rest of the new value canbe entered.

In this figure, AMP is set to its default condition of 1.0 V. Ifthat amplitude is acceptable press [BACK] and the first page ofthe Channel 1 main menu will appear as shown in Figure 4.11.

Also pressing [F1] with the screen of Figure 4.12 displayed, willchange the screen to that shown in Figure 4.13. Note that no[F] keys are used in this menu, the cursor shows the position ofthe number to be entered.

4-15

Page 74: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

AMP = (current value)NEWAMP [] Cursor

C1 SAmplltude Change Submenu

Figure 4.13

Where the current amplitude is shown on line 1. The default(power-up) level of amplitude is 1.000 V. To change amplitudeto 2.0 V, press the [2] key. "2" appears after the "NEWAMP" header. Press [ENTER], and the originalAMP/DELTA/MORE/LESS menu is again displayed, this timewith the top line showing an amplitude of 2.0 V.

Another way to change amplitude is to use the MORE andLESS functions. The delta (default level 100 mV) is the amountby which you can increment the amplitude up or down bypressing [F3] (MORE) or [F4] (LESS).

If amplitude is 2.0 V and delta is 0.5 V, pressing [F3] willincrease the amplitude to 2.5 V, while pressing [F4] once afterthat would decrease the amplitude back to 2.0 V. Within the 0to 10 V range of the instrument, [F3] and [F4] can be pressedin any sequence as many times as need be to achieve a desiredC1 AMP.

If an increment of 0.1 V is unsatisfactory, press [F2] whenFigure 4.12 is displayed. The screen view will then change tothat shown in Figure 4.14. Note that no [F] key is used in thissubmenu. The numeric keys are used to enter a new value, ifdesired.

DELTA = (current value)NEWDELTA [] Cursor

C1 S

Delta Modlflcatlon Submenu

Figure 4.14

A new delta can be entered here, in the same manner asamplitude could be changed with the AMP/NEW AMP

4-16

Page 75: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

ENTRY CHANGES

Changes Made AfterWaveform Executionhas Commenced

Changes Made Priorto Execution of a Waveform

submenu. As the revised delta is keyed in, it will appearimmediately to the right of NEW DELTA. Press [ENTER] toterminate and the AMP/DELTA/MORE/LESS screen will againappear, this time showing the new delta.

By using the AMP/NEW AMP method and/or the deltamethod, channel amplitude can be easily changed and set. Or,progressing through the submenu layers may show that someparameters are acceptable at their current values, in which casenew values need not be entered.

The 9100/CP offers several means for changing entries orcorrecting entries that have been inadvertently made in error.Specifically:

A waveform being executed can be stopped by pressing[SHIFT] and then [ABORT]. Waveform execution will cease.After that the 9100/CP can be used again to re-select awaveform and/or to re-enter desired parameters. Except fordisconnecting the output and turning off the WAVEFORMACTIVE LED, ABORT does not affect any attribute or files.

The Model 9112 executes only waveform files that are loadedinto high speed memory with currently selected waveformattributes. Waveforms may be loaded and attributes changed atany time prior to execution (i.e., "GO;") Examples are follows:¯ The waveform can be re-selected so that a different

waveform is chosen, loaded into high speed memory, andexecuted.

¯ Any individual attribute can be changed by accessing theproper main menu (CHAN 1, CHAN 2, CLOCK, or TRIGkeys) and entering a new setting for that attribute.

¯ If a combination of attribute settings are stored as a setup fileand initiated (put into effect), those settings will become theModel 9112’s current settings. A new combination of settingscan, however, be made current simply by initiating a differentsetup file.

¯ Alternatively, any setting made current by use of a setup filecan be changed to a more current setting merely by accessingthe proper menu line and changing the setting accordingly.

¯ If a waveform is loaded into high speed memory, anotherwaveform can become the currently loaded waveform if the

4-17

Page 76: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Changes Made Priorto Completion ofa Numeric Entry

EliminatingArbitrary Waveform,Setup, and SequenceFiles from RAMDisk Memory

loading process is repeated with the second waveform beforethe GO command is given to execute.

¯ Additionally, an additional waveform can be linked to anycurrently loaded waveform as explained below.

If a number has been keyed in or partially keyed in, but[ENTER] or a units key have not yet been pressed, thatnumber can be "erased" by pressing [SHIFT] and [CE]. Then,numeric entry can be re-entered as desired.

As shown in Figure 4.8, pressing [FUNC] results in a mainmenu that enables selection of arbitrary waveform files, standardwaveform files, setup files, and sequence files. Any arbitrarywaveform, setup, or sequence file can be deleted from RAMdisk memory by a three step process:

- Pressing [FUNC] and then the IF] key corresponding to thetype of file to be deleted ([F1] for arbitrary waveforms, [F3]for setup files, and [F4] for sequence files).

- Pressing the [F] key corresponding to the line on which thefile to be deleted is shown. A @ symbol will then appear tothe right of that line.

- Pressing [SHIFT] and then [DELETE]. The menu of Figure4.15 will appear.

[F3][F4]

ARE YOU SURE?

YESNO

Delete Operation

Figure 4.15

Pressing [F3] will cause the selected file to disappear fromthe screen listing and no longer be in RAM disk memory.Pressing [F4] avoids the delete operation, unmarks thewaveform file and returns to the previous screen.

4-18

Page 77: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Changing all AttributeSettings to DefaultConditions

Changes thatCannot be Madewith the 9100/CP

Pressing [SHIFT] and then [RESET] will cause the menu ofFigure 4.15 to appear. A yes response will cause all 9112settings to revert to default conditions.

The 9100/CP cannot make the following changes:

¯ Altering the contents of a waveform file

¯ Altering the contents of a sequence file

¯ Altering the contents of a setup file.

NOTE: The 9100/CP can, however, store new setup files inmemory (LEARN). Accordingly, if a setup file needs changed, a new setup file can be created and LEARNed. Theoriginal setup file can then be deleted, if desired, as describedabove.

¯ Change one waveform file at any point in a linked series ofwaveform files without re-loading and re-linking everywaveform file in the chain.

4-19

Page 78: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

CONTROLLING THEARBITRARY FUNCTIONGENERATOR WITHTHE 9100/CP

Steps to be Takenin ExecutingWaveforms When controlling the Model 9112 with the 9100/CP, waveform

execution is accomplished in four steps: waveform selection,specification of waveform attributes and trigger parameters,loading the waveform into high speed memory, and execution.

Selection: The 9100/CP, by means of the menus accessed bypressing its [FUNC] key, can select from any of six standardwaveforms, or from arbitrary waveforms downloaded to theModel 9112’s RAM disk memory. The 9100/CP can not beused to create arbitrary waveforms. Nor can it be used tocommand the Model 9112 to replicate waveforms measuredfrom other sources by LeCroy oscilloscopes. These operationscan, however, be performed from a computer using EASYWAVEsoftware.

Specification of Waveform Attributes and TriggerParameters: The [CHAN 1], [CHAN 2], [Clock], and [Trig]keys access menus that control the waveform amplitude,timebase, and trigger commands.

The net effect of those four keys is to define what is called thewaveform setup. A setup can be "learned" (stored in memory)by the [Learn] key on the 9100/CP and implemented by the[Setup] key, which can also implement setups downloaded byEASYWAVE, GPIB, or RS-232 operation.

In addition, the [Seq] key can be pressed to access andimplement sequences; files of GPIB commands that aredownloaded to the Model 9112 via computer control.

Loading and Linking the Waveform into High SpeedMemory: Just because a waveform is selected does not mean itis executed. First, it must be loaded into high speed memory.Pressing the [LOAD] key loads an arbitrary waveform that hasbeen selected. Standard waveforms are automatically loaded andexecuted when they are selected.

Arbitrary waveforms can also be chained together. Pressing the[LINK] key will link an arbitrary waveform to arbitrarywaveforms that are already loaded or linked.

NOTE: To enter a link with "wait" command from the 9100/CPhand held control panel, press the TRIG button instead of theENTER button after entering the number of segment repetitions

4-20

Page 79: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Selecting an ArbitraryWaveform

for LINK. This appends the "wait" argument to the LINKcommand from the 9100/CP.Executing Loaded and Linked Waveforms: Executing isaccomplished by pressing the [GO] key. Execution can beaborted by pressing the [ABORT] key.

Details of these steps are covered below.

Pressing the [FUNC] key causes the menu shown below to bedisplayed.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

ARBITRAR~STANDARD>SETUP>SEQUENCE>

Function Selection Main Menu

Figure 4.16

S

Selecting an Arbitrary (User-Designed) Waveform Stored Memory: If previously downloaded to RAM disk storagememory via the GPIB or RS-232 bus, an ARBITRARYwaveform can be accessed by first accessing the functionselection main menu shown in the above figure, and thenpressing [F1]. This will cause a 4-line submenu to appear, asshown below.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

SING WAVE DIR>DUAL WAVE DIR>CTRL MEM DIR>HS MEM DIR>

Arbitrary Function Submenu

Figure 4.17

Pressing [F1] here will present a listing of the file names for allthe single waveforms stored in RAM memory. If [F2] werepressed, however, the dual waveform names would be displayed.

File names are a combination of as many as eight user-selectedletters and numbers, followed by .WAV for single waveforms, or.WAD for dual waveforms.

4-21

Page 80: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Finding Numberof Repetitions

If no files are stored in any of these categories, the screen willso indicate. For example, if no single arbitrary waveforms are inmemory and [F1] is pressed when Figure 4.17 is displayed, thescreen will show NO .WAV FILES.

If single waveforms files are in RAM memory, pressing [F1]when Figure 4.17 is displayed will bring up a single waveformlisting similar to that shown in Figure 4.18.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

TESTWAV1 .WAVMYWAVE2.WAV

* ANYWAVE,WAVSOMEWAVE.WAV

Single Waveform File Name Listing

Fisure 4.18

S

The symbol ° indicates that ANYWAVE.WAV is the currentlyselected file.

If the MYWAVE2.WAV waveform were desired here, [F2]would be pressed and @ would appear to the right of thesecond line on the screen.

To select a dual waveform that has been downloaded into RAMmemory, press [F2] when Figure 4.17 is displayed. Otherwise,the procedure is exactly as described above.

Pressing [F3] when Figure 4.17 is displayed will cause a displaysimilar to Figure 4.19, where the segment names are thosecurrently loaded and linked in the Control Memory (CM). Thenumbers indicate the number of repetitions for each waveform.This display is information only and no action is required.

A "W" at the end of a segment’s Control Memory listingindicates that the given segment was loaded or linked with the"wait" option, and that the generator will wait until a trigger(or, in recurrent trigger mode, a re-trigger) is received beforeoutputting the segment in question.

4-22

Page 81: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

SEGMENTS = .WAVMYWAVE 1TESTWAVE 43MYWAVE 4095

Loaded and Linked Segments

Filsure 4.19

S

Checking Controlsof HS Memory Pressing [F4] when Figure 4.17 is displayed, will cause a display

similar to Figure 4.20 where the file names shown are thoseactually present in High Speed Memory (HSM). Referring Figure 4.20, note that MYWAVE.WAV is loaded into HSMonly once, even though it is referenced more than once by theControl Memory (CM). This display is information only and action is required.

MYWAVE .WAVTESTWAVE.WAV

Contents of HSMS

Figure 4.20

Selecting a StandardWaveform A standard waveform is selected by first accessing the Function

Selection Main Menu shown in Figure 4.16, and then pressingIF2] (STANDARD). This will cause the first of two pages in theStandard Function submenu to be displayed, Figure 4.21.

4-23

Page 82: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

[F1][F2][F3][F41

SINE>

SQUARE>TRIANGLE>RAMR>

StandardFunction SubmanuFirst Page

Figure 4.21

#S

Where:

SINE> [F1] selects a submenu from which the attributes of thestandard sine function can be selected.

SQUARE> [F2] selects a submenu from which the attributes ofthe standard square function can be selected.

TRIANOLE> ]F3] selects a submenu from which the attributesof the standard triangle function can be selected.

RAMP> IF4] selects a submenu from which the attributes of thestandard ramp function can be selected.

Press [PAGE] and the second page of the Standard FunctionSubmenu will be displayed, Figure 4.22.

[F1 ][F2]

PULSE >DC>

Standard Function SubmanuSeoond Page

Fi|[ure 4.22

Where:

PULSE> [FI] selects a submenu from which the attributes ofthe standard pulse function can be selected.

DC> [F2] selects a submenu from which the attributes of thestandard dc function can be selected.

NOTE: Once the submenu for a particular standard functionhas been selected, output of that function is automaticallyinitiated using the current settings. Default settings are listed inChapter 5 under the commands related to each parameter.

4-24

Page 83: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard Sine Function

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard Square Function

Once the function is active, any change by the user in theattribute submenu for that function will be immediately reflectedin the output of the 9112 AFG.

When [F1] (SINE) is selected on the Standard FunctionSubmenu, the Standard Sine Attribute Submenu is displayed,Figure 4.23.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

SINE MODE <FREQUENCY >C1 PHASE>C2 REL PH>

SING

SIN SStandard Sine Attribute Submenu

Figure 4.23

Where:

SINE MODE< [F1] selects whether the sine function is to beoutput as a SINGLE (SING) or DUAL waveform. The SINGLEwaveform is output on Channel 1 only, the DUAL waveform onboth Channels 1 and 2.

FREQUENCY> [F2] selects a submenu from which thefrequency of the generated sine wave may be set. In SINGLEmode the allowed frequency range is 0.010 - 6.25E+6 Hz; inDUAL mode the allowed range is 0.010 - 6.25E+6 Hz (bothchannels have the same frequency). Units can be Hz, kHz, orMHz.

C1 PHASE> [F3] selects a submenu from which the start phaseof the Channel 1 sine waveform may be set in degrees from 0.0- 360. If SINE_MODE is dual, Channel 2’s start phase will beidentical to Channel l’s unless further action is taken.

C2 REL PH> [F4] selects a submenu from which the startphase of the Channel 2 sine waveform relative to the Channel 1waveform may be set in degrees from 0.0 - 360. Note thatChannel 2 leads Channel 1 by the number of degrees specified.C2 REL PH has no meaning in SINE_MODE SINGLE.

WHEN [F2] (SQUARE) is selected on the Standard FunctionSubmenu, the Standard Square Attribute Submenu is displayed,Figure 4.24.

4-25

Page 84: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

SQU_MODE<SINGFREQUENCY >C1 START >C2_REL_ST > SQR

Standard Square Attribute Subrnenu

Figure 4.24

S

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard Triangle Function

where:

SQU_MODE< [F1] selects single or dual channel square wavegeneration.

FREQUENCY> [F2] selects a submenu from which thefrequency of the generated square wave may be set from 0.01to 25E+6 Hz. Units can be Hz, kHz, or MHz.

C1 START> [F3] selects a submenu from which the start timeof the waveform may be set. The allowed range is from 0.0 tothe currently set period of the square wave.

C2 REL ST> [F4] selects a submenu from which the start timeof t-he ch’annel 2 output relative to the channel 1 output may beset. The allowed range is from 0.0 to the currently set period.This attribute has no meaning for single channel operatingmode.

WHEN [F3] (TRIANGLE) is selected on the Standard FunctionSubmenu, the Standard Triangle Attribute Submenu isdisplayed, Figure 4.25.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

TRI MODE < SINGFREQUENCY >C1 START >C2_REL_ST > TGL S

Standard Triangle Attribute Submenu

Figure 4.25

Where:

TRI MODE> [F1] selects either a single or dual trianglewaveform.

4-26

Page 85: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard Ramp Function

FREQUENCY> [F2] selects a submenu from which thefrequency of the generated triangle wave may be set from 0.010to 6.25E+6 Hz. Units can be Hz, kHz, or MHz.

C1 START> [F3] selects a submenu from which the start timeof t’he waveform may be set. The start time is set not in degreesbut in time; the allowed range is 0.0 to the current period ofthe triangle wave.

C2 REL ST> [F4] selects a submenu from which the relativesta~ time of CH2 can be set from 0 to period for a dual wave.

WHEN [F4] (RAMP) is selected on the Standard FunctionSubmenu, the Standard Ramp Attribute Submenu is displayed,Figure 4.26.

[F1][F21[F3][F4]

RAMP MODE < SINGPERIOD >C1 START >C2 REL ST > RMP S

Standard Ramp Attribute Submenu

Figure 4.26

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard Pulse Function

Where:

RAMP MODE< [F1] selects either a single or dual rampwavefoTm.

PERIOD> [F2] selects a submenu from which the period of thegenerated ramp wave may be set from 160.0 nsec to 100.0 sec.Units can be nsec, Ixsec, msec, sec.

C1 START> [F3] selects a submenu from which the start timeof the waveform may be set. The start time is set not in degreesbut in time; the allowed range is 0.0 to the current PERIOD ofthe ramp wave.

C2 REL ST [F4] selects a submenu from which the relativesta~ time of CH2 in dual mode can be set from 0.0 to period.

WHEN [F1] (PULSE) is selected on the second page of theStandard Function Submenu, the Standard Pulse AttributeSubmenu is displayed, Figure 4.27.

4-27

Page 86: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

PERIOD>WIDTH >DELAY>OPTIMIZE> PLS

Standard Pulse Attrlbute Submenu

Figure 4.27

S

Selecting Attributes Of TheStandard DC Function

Where:

PERIOD> [F1] selects a submenu from which the period of thegenerated pulse wave may be set from 80.0 nsec to 10.0 sec.Units can be nsec, p.sec, msec, sec.

WIDTH> [F2] selects a submenu from which the width of thegenerated pulse (the duration of the high part of the pulsewaveform) may be set from 20 nsec to 10.0 sec. Units can bensec, I~sec, reset, sec.

DELAY> [F3] selects a submenu which allows the setting of thedelay in time from the receipt of a trigger to the start of thepulse waveform (the first rising edge). The allowed range 125 nsec to 5.0 msec in single or burst trigger mode, and340 nsec to 5.0 msec in recurrent trigger mode. The DELAYhas no meaning in continuous or gated trigger modes. Units canbe nsec, ~sec, msec, sec.NOTE: In the standard pulse function the trigger delay must beset using this submenu and not the TRIG DELAY submenulocated in the Trigger Main Menu.

OPTIMIZE> [F4] selects a submenu which allows the user tospecify whether the pulse function is to be generated so as toachieve highest accuracy on the pulse WIDTH (WID), PERIOD(PER), or DELAY (DEL) attribute.

When [F2] (DC) is selected on the second page of theStandard Function Submenu, the Standard DC AttributeSubmenu is displayed, Figure 4.28.

4-28

Page 87: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

[F1][F2][F3]

DC MODE < SINGCH 1 VOLTS>CH 2 VOLTS >

Standard Pulse Attribute Submenu

Figure 4.28

S

Channel 1 WaveformAttribute Menus

Where:

DC MODE< [F1] selects whether the DC function is to beoutput as a SINGLE (SING) or DUAL waveform. The SINGLEwaveform is output on Channel 1 only, the DUAL waveform onboth Channels t and 2.

CH 1 VOLTS> [F2] selects a parameter/delta submenu fromwhich the DC voltage at the channel 1 output is specified. Thelimits are -10 V to +10 V into a high impedance load, or -5 Vinto a 50 Q load. If load compensation is enabled, and theapplied load is less than 220 ~ the output voltage limits will varyas determined by the 100 mA output current limit, the 50back termination, and the output amplifier’s maximum outputvoltage. The default value is +1 V.

CH 2 VOLTS> IF3] selects a parameter/delta submenu fromwhich the DC voltage at the channel 2 output is specified. Thelimits and default are the same as above.

NOTE: In addition to being locked out of the clock controlmenu (as in all other standard functions), standard function also removes amplitude, offset, zref and invert, for bothchannels, from user control.

Pressing the [CHAN 1] key on the 9100/CP will result indisplay of the first of three pages in the Channel 1 main menu,Figure 4.29.

4-29

Page 88: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

IF1 ][F2][F3][F4]

C1 AMP >OFFSET >ZREF >OUTPUT < ON #

First Page of Channel 1 Main Menu

Figure 4.29

#S

Where:

C1 AMP> [F1] selects the next submenu which allows settingthe amplitude of the Channel 1 waveform in units of mV or V.Range is 10 V p-p with 50 fl termination, 20 V p-p opencircuit. Minimum amplitude is 76 p.V into an open circuit, 38~V into 50 f~.

OFFSET> [F2] selects the next menu which allows setting theChannel 1 DC offset level from -5 V to +5 V in units of mV orV.

Z REF> [F3] selects the next submenu which allowsspecification of the zero reference in 4096 counts from 0 to4095.

OUTPUT< [F4] selects the function used to determine whetherchannel signal output is on or off. This is a toggle.

If [PAGE] is pressed when the screen shown in Figure 4.29 isdisplayed, the second page of the Channel 1 main menu willappear on the screen as shown in Figure 4.30.

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

INVERT< OFFLOAD CMP< OFFDIG WORD < OFF

#RSecond Page of Channel 1 Main Menu

Fil~ure 4.30

Where:

INVERT< [F1] selects the function which inverts the Channel 1waveform. [F1] toggles this line from OFF to ON (inverted)and back again. The zero reference value is automaticallyadjusted by the invert command.

4-30

Page 89: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

LOAD CMP< [F2] toggles the load compensation function ofthe Model 9112. The default state for this feature is off. WhenLOAD CMP is enabled, the 9112 will measure the loadsconnected to its two analog outputs. From that point on, allinternal calculations concerning amplitude and offset are basedon that load being applied. If the load compensation feature isdisabled, a load of 50 f~ is assumed.

NOTE: The load measurement is accomplished by determiningwhat DAC code will be necessary to drive the load to 1 V. Ifthe device to be driven could be damaged by the application ofa 1 V input, the compensation calculations must be performedby the user, based on the 9112’s 50 fl source impedance.

DIG WORD< [F3] toggles the Digital Word output enablefunction. The default state is off, meaning that all clock anddata lines on Channel l’s Digital Word output will be in the lowstate. Note that even when the Digital Word outputs areenabled, they will be turned off during a Calibration orSelf-Test operation. They will be returned to the "on" statewhen the operation is completed.

NOTE: This function may not be implemented in pre-releasefirmware versions (prior to 1.0). In these versions, the Digitaloutputs are always enabled.

[F4] is not used in this page of the Channel 1main menu.

With the second page of the Channel 1 main menu on display(Figure 4.30), pressing [Page] again will cause the third and lastpage of that menu to appear on the screen, Figure 4.31.

[F1][F2]

C1 CALIBRATE <SELF TEST <

Third Page of Channel 1 Main Menu

Figure 4.31

R

Pressing [F1] when this menu page is displayed results inautomatic calibration of the amplitude and offset conditions inthe Model 9112. The screen display will change to sayCALIBRATION IN PROCESS and the 9100/CP will be lockedout of operation until the calibration is complete, when thescreen will again change to say CALIBRATION COMPLETE.

4-31

Page 90: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Channel 2 WaveformAttribute Menus

At that point, pressing any key will cause the 9100/CP and theModel 9112 to function in accordance with the commandinherent in that key.

Calibration may be performed with the load compensationfeature on or off. If LOAD CMP is ON, the outputs will bedisconnected, and calibration will be accomplished using theinternal 50 fI load. After this, the outputs will be reconnected,and the loads will be measured by the application of a 1 V D.C.level.

Pressing [F2] under this menu page will initiate a complete 9112self-test cycle. This includes the calibration described above, aswell as tests of all memory areas (RAM-disk, control memoryand waveform memory), and a test of the data path betweenthe waveform memory and the output boards. This battery oftests takes about 70 seconds to complete.

[F3] and [F4] are not used in this page of the Channel 1 mainmenu.

As shown above, the Channel 1 main menu has a total of nineparameters. Of those, four (OUTPUT, DIG WORD, INVERTand LOAD CMP) are [F] key toggled, while two (CALIBRATEand SELF TEST) result in a direct action.

The three remaining parameters (C1 AMP, OFFSET, ZREF)are controlled via parameter-delta submenus. In each case,accessing the parameter-delta submenu will display the currentor default value of the parameter, and changes can be made inthat value by direct entry or by use of the MORE and LESSprompts.

To access the Channel 2 main menu, press the [CHAN 2] keyand the first page of a three page Channel 2 main menu willappear on the 9100/CP screen.

The Channel 2 main menu allows setting of amplitude, offset,load compensation, output, Z reference, and invert commandsfor Channel 2 independent of the settings for Channel 1.

Controlling The Timebase When the [CLOCK] key is pressed, the first of two timebasemain menu pages appears on screen, Figure 4.32.

NOTE: If standard functions have been selected then themessage: "No clock control standard function in process" willappear. All clock control in standard function is via thestandard function frequency or period selections.

4-32

Page 91: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

[F1][F2][F3][F4]

CLOCK RATE>CLOCK PERIOD>CLOCK LEVEL>CLOCK SRC< INT

First Page of Tlmebase Main Menu

Figure 4.32

#R

Where:

CLOCK RATE > [FI] selects the next submenu which allowssetting of internal clock repetition rate from 0.025 Hz to50 MHz. Units can be Hz, kHz, or MHz.

CLOCK PERIOD > [F2] selects the next submenu which allowsthe internal clock period from 20 nsec to 40 seconds. Units canbe nsec, Bsec, msec, or sec.

NOTE: Although the 9IO0/CP displays the above parameterswith only 4 digits of precision, up to 9 digits can be entered (8if a decimal point is used). The entire number entered istransferred to the AFG, and the timebase is adjusted to a pointas close to that as is possible, even though the CP only displaysthe 4 most significant digits.

CLOCK LEVEL > IF3] selects the next submenu which allowssetting of the threshold detection level if an external clock isused. Can be set from -2.5 V to +2.5 V with three digits ofresolution.

CLOCK SRC < IF4] selects the function which toggles betweenan internal or external clock source. When generatingsingle-channel waveforms, the external clock may be operatedat frequencies up to 100 MHz, and the point output rate will be1/2 the external clock frequency. For dual-channel waveforms,the point outpout rate is 1/4 of the external clock frequency,but the clock may be run at frequencies up to 200 MHz.

NOTE: When the internal clock is used, the user does not haveto set both clock rate and clock period. One is the inverse ofthe other, and changing either one will automatically adjust theother accordingly. Selection of which to use is subject solely touser preference.

Press [PAGE] when Figure 4.32 is shown, and the second pageof the timebase main menu will appear, Figure 4.33.

4-33

Page 92: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

[F1 ][F2][F3]

CLOCK SLOPE< POSCLOCK REF< INTCLOCK MODE< MASTER

CLK

Seoond Page of Tlmebue Maln Menu

Fllure 4.33

R

Where:

CLOCK SLOPE< [F1] is used to specify which edge of anexternally applied clock signal will cause transitions of theanalog output. The default is the positive edge and the [F1] keyacts as a toggle.

CLOCK REF< [F2] determines the source of the 4 MHzreference signal required by the AFG’s phase-lock loop. Thedefault is the internal 4 MHz crystal (INT). The [F2] keytoggles the selected source to the rear-panel CLOCK IN REFconnector (EXT).

CLOCK MODE< [F3] is used to select master or slave clockoperating mode. Master mode is the default setting.

CLOCK MODE,SLAVE is used to synchronize one 9112 AFGto another. The unit placed in SLAVE mode uses the signal onthe CLOCK IN (EXT.) rear panel BNC connector as its clock.This signal is assumed to come from the CLOCK OUT 2 rearpanel BNC connector of another 9112 which is in CLOCKMODE MASTER.

NOTE: CLOCK OUT 1 provides continuous output at twice theclock frequency for single channel waveforms, or 4 times theclock frequency for dual channel waveforms. Only CLOCK OUT2 is suitable for MASTER/SLAVE operation.

Upon entering slave mode, CLOCK SOURCE defaults toEXTERNAL, CLOCK SLOPE defaults to positive, and CLOCKLEVEL defaults to -200 inV. The previous settings are restoredupon receipt of a CLOCK MODE, MASTER command. Whilein slave mode, the CLOCK SOURCE and CLOCK SLOPEcannot be changed. CLOCK LEVEL can be changed. Also,while a unit is in slave mode, TRIGGER MODE settings haveno effect. The trigger delay is controlled by the absence ofclock pulses from the master 9112. Trigger settings enteredwhile in SLAVE mode will correctly take effect when the clock

4-34

Page 93: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

mode is changed to MASTER. Other commands that have noeffect in SLAVE mode are: CRAT, CPER, MDEL, DMOD.

To use two 9112s in master/slave operation, do the following:

1. Set one of the 9112s to clock mode slave and connect acable from the master’s CLOCK OUT 2 to the slave’sCLOCK IN (EXT.).

2. LOAD and LINK the desired waveforms on both 9112s.

3. Issue "GO;" to the slave.

4. Issue "GO;" to the master.

NOTE: Steps 3 and 4 must be done in order. Any time themaster aborts waveform generation, whether because of anABORT command or because of a change of trigger settings,etc., both master and slave must be aborted and GO’s issued inthe proper order. Failure to issue GO to the slave first while themaster is still stopped will result in loss of synchronization.

The START, SYNC and MARKER outputs of the master unitmay be used, those of the slave unit are disabled.

Of the six parameters in the timebase main menu, four aretoggled:

¯ Pressing [F4] on the first page of the menu toggles theCLOCK SRC from INT (internal) to EXT (external) back again.

¯ Pressing [F1] on the second page of the menu toggles theexternal clock slope from POS (positive) to NEG (negative)and back again.

¯ Pressing [F2] on the second page of the menu toggles theclock reference from INT (internal) to EXT (external) back again.

¯ Pressing [F3] on the second page of the menu togglesCLOCK MODE from MASTER to SLAVE and back again.

NOTE: When the clock source is internal, only CLOCK RATEor CLOCK PERIOD need be specified; clock level and slopehave no meaning and need not be used with the internal clock.

When the clock source is external, however, only CLOCKLEVEL and CLOCK SLOPE need be specified. The rate orperiod of an external clock cannot be controlled from the9100/CP, so the first two lines of Figure 4.32 can bedisregarded if the clock source is set to EXT.

CLOCK RATE, CLOCK PERIOD, and CLOCK LEVEL arespecified using parameter-delta submenus.

4-35

Page 94: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

The CLOCK menu of the 9100/CP is blocked while the 9112 isgenerating one of its standard functions. This is because the9112 automatically sets the clock rate for standard functions.However, since the menu is entirely blocked, it is not possibleto change CLOCK SOURCE or CLOCK REFERENCE from the9100/CP while executing a standard function. To change eitherof these items while a standard function is being generated,press: [FUNCTION], ARBITRARY, [CLOCK] and change thedesired items (threshold level and slope selection for externalclock should also be made at this point). When selection iscomplete, press [FUNCTION], [F2] (STANDARD), and thefunction key for the desired standard function. Output of thefunction will commence automatically, without the OOcommand. Frequency information presented on the standardfunction sub-menus will be incorrect if the external clock sourceis selected, but requesting a lower frequency can add morepoints to the waveform. The point output rate will be equal tothe external clock’s frequency for single channel functions, halfthe clock rate for dual channels.

Trigger Controlwith the 9100/CP Complete details on the Model 9112’s triggering and trigger

control capabilities are found in Chapter 2. For ease ofreference, the instrument’s trigger modes, trigger sources, triggerarm modes, and trigger delays are summarized below.

4-36

Page 95: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Table 4.3Trigger Modes, Arm Modes, Sources and Delay Capabilities

Description ofUser-Specified delay

Trigger Trigger between trigger receiptTrigger Mode Resultant Waveform Source Arm Source end waveform start

CONTINUOUS Continuous Automatic;Implicit with GO No

RECURRENT Executes N Repeats Internal (Does not have 8 clock cycles to 1/2(Implicit with GO to be selected million clock cycles

or Implementedby user

SINGLE Executes Once Manual, Bus, AUTO 2 clock cycles to oneor External or million clock cycles (plusAnalog BUS a minimum of 2 1/2 cycles

BURST Execute N Repeats reset time if in AUTO arm)

GATED Continuous as long External Automatic 2 clock cycles to oneas trigger signal analog (Implicit with GO) million clock cycleslevel Is aboveuser-selected from the leading edgethreshold of the Gate signal.

NOTES: I. N max = 65,535 In RECURRENT and BURST modes2. The difference between RECURRENT and BURST Isthat the former Is automatically armed and fired, whilethe latter can be armed via computer or the 91001CP,and fired by either an external analog signal, bypushing the trigger button on the front panel of theModel 9112 (manual), by BUS firing (host computer),or by TGR from the 91001CP.3. With the 91001CP, the TRIG key accesses menusthat allow choosing trigger mode, trigger source,and trigger arm source.4. The 91001CP’s T.ARM key can always be used toarm the trigger. It Is not affected by Trigger Arm Source Selection.5. The TRG key on the 91001CP can always be used to fire the trigger.It Is not affected by Trigger Source Selection.6. The GO key on the 91001CP Is used to executeloaded waveforms.

4-37

Page 96: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Trigger MainMenu Control Press the [TRIG] key on the 9100/CP and the first of two

trigger main menu screens will come into view, Figure 4.34.

[F1 ][F2]

[F3]

[F4]

where

TRIG MODE >DELAY MODE< PTSTRIG DELAY>

TRIG ARM SRC> #RFirst Page of Trigger Main Menu

Figure 4.34

TRIO MODE > [F1] selects a submenu from which one of thefive trigger modes tabulated in Table 4.3 can be selected.

DELAY MODE < IF2] selects whether trigger and markerdelays are to be specified in POINTS (PTS) or TIME (TIM).Note that when the CLOCK SOURCE is EXTERNAL, the 9112does not know the clock’s period and is unable to calculate howmany points is equivalent to how much time. Therefore,DELAY MODE, POINTS should be used when CLOCKSOURCE is EXTERNAL.

TRIG DELAY > IF3] selects a submenu from which the triggerdelay may be entered in the selected Delay Mode (i.e., POINTSor TIME).

TRIG ARM SRC > IF4] selects a submenu which displays thetrigger arm source and where it may be toggled between BUSand AUTO.

Press [PAGE] and the second page of the trigger main menuwill appear as shown in Figure 4.35.

[F1]

[F2][F3]

[F4]

TRIG SOURCE >TRIG SLOPE <TRIG LEVEL >

TIME MARKER >

POS

RSecond Page of Trigger Main Menu

Figure 4.35

TRIG SOURCE > [F1] selects a submenu which displays thecurrent trigger source or sources selected and allows for toggling

4-38

Page 97: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Arming and Firingthe Trigger withthe 9100/CP

their condition between ON/OFF. The sources are EXTERNAL,BUS and MANUAL.

TRIG SLOPE < [F2] selects whether the external trigger willfire on the rising (positive) or falling (negative) edge. command is used only if the trigger mode is SINGLE, BURST,or GATED.

TRIG LEVEL > [F3] selects a submenu which allows setting thethreshold level at which an external signal will cause thewaveform to start. It can be -2.5 V to +2.5 V with 3 digits ofresolution.

TIME MARKER > [F4] controls the time position of theMarker output pulse by setting a delay of up to a half millionclock cycles (points) between the trigger and the Marker outputpulse. Note that if the Marker delay is programmed for anumber greater than the sum of the trigger delay and the totalnumber of points that will be output (including segmentrepetitions, links, and waveform repetitions), no Marker pulsewill be generated. Also, at clock rates greater than 10 MHz, thewidth of the Marker pulse (nominally 75 nsec) may be reducedif it is positioned with 75 nsec of the last point generated.

If the Continuous or Recurrent mode is chosen, a selectedwaveform that has been LOADed or LINKed will be executedby pressing [GO].

If Gated mode is selected, pressing [GO] will result in executionas long as the external analog trigger signal level is above auser-designated threshold.

In Single or Burst modes with Bus source and Bus Arm mode,trigger firing is user-implemented and occurs after [GO] ispressed. Execution will therefore not occur until the trigger isfired.

When Single or Burst mode is selected the 9100/CP can also beused to arm the trigger. This is accomplished by pressing[SHIFT] and the [T.ARM]. Pressing [SHIFT] and [TGR] willcause the trigger to be fired, the screen to say TRIGGEREDand the waveform to be executed.

The trigger will be automatically armed when Single or Burstmode is selected with AUTO arming.

4-39

Page 98: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

WORKING WITHSETUP FILES A setup file is one that contains all waveform attributes and

trigger parameters accessed by the [CHAN 1], [CHAN 2],[CLOCK], and [TRIG] keys of the 9100/CP.

When the [FUNC] key is pressed, the function selection mainmenu appears as shown in Figure 4.36.

IF1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

ARBITRARY>

STANDARD >

SETUP >

SEQUENCE >Function Selection Main Menu

Fl~ure 4.36

R

Pressing [F3] when Figure 4.36 is displayed will cause the9100/CP’s LCD screen to display a listing of all setup files inmemory. If no setup files are stored, the screen will say NO.SET FILES.

When setup files are stored, however, each such file is namedwith 8 characters followed by .SET. Any setup file shown in thelist can then be selected by pressing the [F] key correspondingto the line on which that file is listed. An @ sign will appear tothe right of that file as soon as that [F] key is pressed.

If [SHIFT] and then [SETUP] are pressed, the screen view willchange to that shown in Figure 4.37.

SETUP INITIATED

SETXXX.SET

Setup ConfirmationR

Figure 4.37

Where SETXXX.SET is the name of the selected file.

When Figure 4.37 appears, all commands in the selected filebecome the current (active) channel, timebase, and triggercommands controlling the Arbitrary Function Generator. Pressany key when Figure 4.37 is displayed, and the instrument

4-40

Page 99: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

operation will continue in accordance with the commandinherent in that key.

In addition to recalling setup files, the 9100/CP can be used tocreate them. Whenever the [LEARN] key is pressed, theinstrument creates and stores a setup file of all current channel,timebase, and [TRIG] key parameters. Such a file isautomatically given the file name SETXXX.SET, where XXX isa number assigned by the AFG.

The [LEARN] key can be pressed at any time, after which thescreen on the 9100/CP will change from whatever it was showingto the display in Figure 4.38.

LEARNED

SETXXX.SET

Learn Confirmation Screen

Figure 4.38

R

Press any key to continue using the 9100/CP after a LEARNoperation. If you press [FUNC], for example, the screen inFigure 4.36 will reappear, and you can then press [F3] toaccess a list containing the new setup file.

WORKING WITHSEQUENCE FILES The 9100/CP cannot be used to create or store sequence files.

If [F4] is pressed when the function selection main menu(reference Figure 4.36) is displayed, however, the screen will listany sequence files created and stored in the Model AFG viacomputer operation. If no sequence files are in memory, thescreen will say NO .SEQ FILES.

When one or more sequence files are in memory, however, theywill be listed. Any listed sequence file can then be selected bypressing the [F] key corresponding to the line on which that fileappears.

To execute a selected sequence file, press [SHIFT] and then[SEQ]. This will result in the screen view shown in Figure 4.39.

4-41

Page 100: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation

SEQUENCE INITIATED

LOADING ANDLINKING WAVEFORMS

Arbitrary Waveforms

FILENAME.SEQ

Learn Confirmation SoreenR

Fisure 4.39

Where FILENAME.SEQ is the name of the selected file.Pressing any key will enable continued use of the 9100/CP afterthe screen in Figure 4.39 appears.The 9100/CP’s screen will say WAITING FOR NEXT at anypoint at which a WAIT is incorporated into a sequence that hasbeen selected and initiated. To continue the sequence, press[SHIFT] and then [NEXT]. The screen will then saySEQUENCE CONTINUED as the sequence does in factcontinue.

Once an arbitrary waveform (single or dual) has been selected,it can be loaded into fast memory by pressing the [LOAD] key.A prompt on the LCD display will then ask how manyrepetitions of that waveform are to be loaded. You can respondwith any whole number up to 4095.

If you just press [ENTER], the number of repetitions defaults toone. Or, you can press the number keys corresponding to thedesired number of repetitions and then press [ENTER].

Once [ENTER] is pressed, the 9100/CP’s screen will change tothe display shown in Figure 4.40.

LOADED

FILENAME.WAV

SLoading Confirmation

Figure 4.40

where "FILENAME" represents whatever name the selected filehas, and .WAV indicates that file to be a single arbitrary

4-42

Page 101: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

waveform. If a dual arbitrary waveform is selected, .WAD wouldappear instead of .WAV. To continue using the 9100/CP afterFigure 4.40 appears, press any key.

After an arbitrary function is loaded into fast memory, anotherarbitrary waveform may be linked to it. If desired, yet anotherarbitrary waveform may be linked to that one. Linking cancontinue until all points in the high speed memory are used up,or the total number of loaded and linked wave segments is 682.

Single arbitrary waveforms, however, can be linked only to othersingle arbitrary waveforms. Similarly, dual arbitrary waveformscan be linked only to other dual arbitrary waveforms.

To link a selected waveform to waveform(s) already loaded linked, press [LINK]. The LCD screen will ask how manyrepetitions are desired. As with LOAD, you can default to onerepetition and terminate by pressing [ENTER]. Also as withLOAD, LINK is confirmed with a screen that names the linkedfile and tells you that it has been LINKED. Press any other keyto continue after that.

The LINK command accepts an additional argument, WAIT.The purpose of this argument is to permit each trigger to causeoutput of different waveform segments (in single trigger mode).To enter a link with "wait" command from the 9100/CPhandheld control panel, press the TRIG button instead of theENTER button after entering the number of segment repetitionsfor LINK. This appends the "wait" argument to the LINKcommand fromt he 9100/CP.

The "WAIT" argument, if present, tells the 9112 series AFG towait for trigger before executing this segment. More precisely, ittells the AFG to act as if the entire waveform ended with thesegment before this one, and this segment is the first one in thenext waveform repetition. (See Chapter 3 for details.)

NOTE:

1. Neither loading or linking will occur unless a waveform hasfirst been selected.

2. The number of repetitions is the number of times thewaveform will be executed.

3. The number of repetitions for LOADed or LINKedwaveforms if CONTINUOUS or GATED triggering is usedcontrols how many reps occur between START pulses.

4. Whenever a waveform is loaded, any waveform that hadpreviously been loaded or linked is cleared from high speedmemory.

4-43

Page 102: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation

Standard Waveforms

EXECUTINGWAVEFORMS

ABORTINGWAVEFORMS

ACCESSING THE STATEOF THE ARBITRARYFUNCTION GENERATOR

Identifying WhichFiles Are Active

Parameters for standard waveforms are automatically loaded asthey are entered. Standard waveforms cannot, however, belinked to other standard waveforms or to arbitrary waveforms.

In the event that standard waveform linking is desirable, theAFG must be returned to remote mode where the waveform tobe linked can be created as an "arbitrary" waveform. Oncecreated, such a waveform can be linked as described above.

The 9100/CP executes loaded and linked arbitrary waveformswhen the [GO] key is pressed. At that time, the 9100/CPscreen will say "R" in the last position of the 4th line toindicate that the waveform has been executed. If a waveformhas not been loaded, execution will not occur and the screenwill say NO WAVEFORM LOADED. Press the [BACK] key toreturn to previous screen. Press any other key to continue afterexecution commences.

Execution of standard functions initiates immediately uponselection of the function, using the current instrument settings.The [GO] key need not be pressed, unless this function hadpreviously been aborted

To stop execution, press [SHIFT] and [ABORT]. The screenwill say "S" in the last position of the 4th line and theexecution will cease. You can then press any 9100/CP key tocontinue. Aborting a waveform does not effect any attributes orfiles, except outputs are disconnected and waveform active LEDwill extinguish. The waveform can be reinitiated by simplypressing [GO].

If the 9100 Series AFG is executing a single or dual waveformof unknown specifications, the 9100/CP can be used to identifythose specifications.

Start by pressing the [VIEW] key. If the first line of the screenthat comes into view says FUNC: ARBITRARY, the AFG isexecuting a single arbitrary waveform, a series of single arbitrarywaveforms linked together, or a dual arbitrary waveform.

In the event that FUNC is followed by STANDARD, however,the AFG is in standard waveform mode and no particular

4-44

Page 103: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Identifying ActiveArbitrary Waveforms

standard function has been selected. If a standard function hasbeen selected the first line of the first page of VIEW will showfunc=SINE, SQUARE, TRIANGLE, RAMP, PULSE or DC.

Determination of arbitrary or standard waveform activity iscritical to waveform identification, since the generator cannotexecute both waveform types simultaneously.

To identify which arbitrary waveforms are loaded and linked,and to determine which setup files and sequence files are active,press [SHIFT] and then [ACTIVE].

The top line will include the name of the first waveform loaded,the next line the name of the first waveform linked (if any arelinked), with the next lines naming any other linked waveforms.After waveforms are listed, the subsequent lines will name setup(.SET) and sequence (.SEQ) files that are active.

If no arbitrary waveforms have been loaded or linked, thescreen will say NO .WAV ACTIVE or NO .WAD ACTIVE.Similarly, NO .SET ACTIVE and/or NO .SEQ ACTIVE willappear when no setup files or sequence files have beenimplemented.

Another way of identifying active arbitrary waveforms is to press[FUNC] and then [F1]. Press [F1] again to access singlearbitrary waveform files, or [F2] for dual arbitrary waveformfiles. As the files are listed on screen in each case, an asterisk*will appear beside an arbitrary waveform file that is loaded orlinked.

Identifying ActiveStandard Waveforms As mentioned above, the first line of VIEW may show an active

standard function. To access or select standard functions press[FUNC] and [F2]. This will result in a 2-page display ofstandard waveforms, with SINE, SQUARE, TRIANGLE, andRAMP on the first page, while PULSE and DC are on thesecond page. Use [PAGE] and/or [BACK] to display the pagecontaining the standard waveform type identified by VIEW asbeing active. Then, press the [F] key corresponding to the lineon which that waveform type is shown.

Pressing [F2] on the first standard waveform menu page forexample, will result in the submenu for square waves, andpressing [F2] again will show the current frequency of thatwave. The process is shown graphically by the flow chart shownin Figure 4.41.

4-45

Page 104: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

IARBITRAR~ISTANDARD>

FUNC--ISETUP>

ISEQUENCE>

I I SINE >

-F2- SQUARE>TRIANGLE>

S RAMP>

I /SQUMODE<SINGI II-F2-1 FREQUENCY> l-F2-1

I /m START> / I#SJ |C2-REL_ST>SQR SI I

Accessing the Frequency of an Executed Square Wave

FREQ: IDELTA>MORE<LESS< SRQ S

Figure 4.41

Identifying ActiveSetup and SequenceFiles

Reviewing InstrumentSettings

Accessing the MainStatus Byte Condition

As stated on the previous page active setup and sequence filescan be identified by pressing [SHIFT] and then [ACTIVE].

Another approach is to press [FUNC] and then [F3] to listsetup files stored in memory. An asterisk is to the left of anysetup file that is active. FUNC and [F4] will identify activesequence files.

Keep in mind, however, that waveforms may be executedwithout selecting a setup file. If such a waveform has beenloaded and the [GO] key is pressed, the Model 9112 willexecute the waveform based on current setup conditions. In thatinstance, or to identify the details of a named setup file,pressing the [VIEW] key will lead you to a 17-page menu thatwill identify current setup conditions.

Pressing the [VIEW] key will cause the 9100/CP screen todisplay the first page of a multiple page information menu thatshows the current value of all settings.

Moving from one page to another through the 17 VIEW pagesis accomplished by using the [PAGE] and [BACKI keys.

Pressing [SHIFT] and then [STB] will result in the 9100/CPdisplaying a three-line informational menu as shown in Figure4.42.

4-46

Page 105: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

Determining theCurrent Status Mode

STATUS BYTE 1

BIT 76543210

STB 01000000

MASK 00000000 #RMain Status Byte Condition Listing

Fil~ure 4.42

Where each of the bits in the STB line (with the exception ofbit 6, which is the Require Service bit) represents the status of group of instrument conditions. The MASK line indicates which,if any, STB values are masked so as to not cause a ServiceRequest (SRQ) to be generated.

See Chapter 5 for a detailed description of the hierarchicalstructure of the status bytes. All status bytes and masks aredisplayable and executing the STB command does not affect thestatus byte or mask.

When the [STATUS] key is pressed, Figure 4.43 will appear onthe screen of the 9100/CP.

LOCKOUT=OFFTRIG N/A

Status Menu

Figure 4.43

Looking at the two lines in Figures 4.43:

LOCKOUT indicates whether lockout is invoked, ON meaningthat the Model 9112 is set to be controlled only by computercommand and that the 9100/CP is "locked out" from control.OFF, on the other hand, means that the 9100/CP is in controlor can regain control.

TRIG identifies the status of trigger arming in the Single andBurst trigger modes. ARMED, UNARMED, and N/A are thepossible readouts on this line, with N/A indicating that theinstrument is set to trigger in neither the Single mode nor theBurst mode.

4-47

Page 106: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

4 Control Panel Operation

Displaying thePresent BusCommunicationsCommands Pressing [SHIFT] and [COMM] will result, Figure 4.44, in

display of the first page of a two page informational menu thatidentifies current communications commands.

HEADER=OFF

TRAILER=SEMI

RS232 FMT=m

GPIB FMT=L #S

First Page of COMM MenuFigure 4.44

If [Page] is pressed while Figure 4.44 is displayed, the secondpage of the COMM menu will be shown, Figure 4.45.

BLOCKSIZE=0STRDELIM= "

SOURCE=GPIBS

Seoond Page of COMM MenuFigure 4.45

Where:

HEADER defines the header format being used in buscommunications. OFF presents no header with the data,SHORT presents the short form of the header, and LONGpresents the long form of the header.

TRAILER defines the trailer format used in buscommunications when the generator transmits to externalequipment. Possibilities are CRLF (carriage return/line feed);CR (carriage return); LF (line feed); SEMI (semi-colon); OFF (no trailer).

RS232 FMT is the data format for RS-232 block transfers, L, Ior OF1~.

GPIB_FMT is the data format for the GPIB block transfers, L,9, 0, or OFF.

BLOCKSIZE sets the blocksize for block transfers over the bus,0 to 65,536 in 8-byte increments.

4-48

Page 107: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Control Panel Operation 4

STRDELIM defines the ASCII character that the Model 9112recognizes as a string delimiter.

SOURCE: designates the bus over which the Model 9112 is setto communicate: RS-232 or GPIB.

NOTE: See Chapter 5 for additional details on Model 9112communications commands.

4-49

Page 108: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

5 OPERATING OVER THE GPIB ]

INTRODUCTION

REMOTE MODE

LOCAL MODE

ADDRESSING

The generator can be operated over the General PurposeInterface Bus (GPIB). GPIB is the standard implementation the IEEE 488-1978 standard and the identical ANSI standardMC1.1. The following interface functions have been implementedon the LeCroy 9100 Series Arbitrary Function Generators: SH1,AH1,T6,TE0,L4,LE0,SR1,RL1,PP0,DC1,DT1, and CO. Exceptfor the line switch, all generator operations are fullyprogrammable over the GPIB.

In this manual, program codes are shown as characters, whichshould be transmitted in ASCII code.

The generator always powers up in the Local Mode (the LocalLED in the "STATUS" box should be lit). It switches to remoteoperation (the LOCAL LED goes out) upon receipt of theremote message. The remote message has two parts:

1. Remote Enable (REN) bus control line is set true, and,

2. Device Listen Address is received once (while REN is true).

In remote, the generator can be addressed to talk or listen.When addressed to listen, it responds to device-dependentcommands and standard GPIB bus commands(device-independent commands). When addressed to talk, thegenerator can send responses to queries. Whether addressed ornot the generator responds to the Clear (DCL), Local Lockout(LLO), Clear Lockout/Set Local (GTL), and Interface Clear(IFC) messages. In remote only the LOCAL button on the9100/CP is active, all other controls are disabled. In remote withlockout, all controls including the LOCAL button are disabled.

In Local, the manual trigger button on the front panel and thedetachable control panel are fully operable. In this mode thegenerator responds only to the Remote message from the GPIB.

The generator’s address is set by a DIP switch located on therear panel of the instrument. The address is set to 1 at thefactory. Any address between 1 and 30 can be assigned to thegenerator. The procedure to set the address switch is describedin Chapter 3 under GPIB Address Selection. The address switchis read only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, if theunit is already on and the address switch is changed, the powermust be cycled to complete the address change.The generator interprets the byte on the eight GPIB data lines(DIO-1 to DIO-8) as an IEEE-488 bus command rather than device-dependent message if it receives the data while theAttention (ATN) control line is true and the Interface Clear

5-1

Page 109: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

0peratin8 Over the GPIB

MESSAGES

DEVICE DEPENDENTMESSAGES

Message Input Format

(IFC) control line is false. The most common bus commands areTalk <address> and Listen <address>.

Each time the generator is addressed, either the Talk or ListenLED on the front panel will flash.

The generator communicates on the bus primarily with"device-dependent" command, or file messages. These messagesconsist of one or more bytes sent over the bus’ eight data lineswhile the ATN bus control line is false.In this section "message" means an IEEE-488 standard messagecommand or "device-dependent message". The generatorresponds to commands when it is enabled to Remote (REN buscontrol line is true) and it is addressed to listen. The instrumentremains addressed to listen until it receives a talk address, anIFC message, or a universal unlisten command.

Input messages program instrument functions. These messagescontain a string of device-dependent commands. Programcommands within a message must be separated with the properdelimiter (separator) and are executed when a message unitterminator (Trailer or <END>) is received. There are two levelsof delimiters:Message Unit Separators: Different commands within a messageunit must be separated with a <;>. The separator between acommand Header and the first argument can be any of thefollowing: Space<SP>, Equal sign<=>, or a comma<,>. Eachadditional argument must be separated with a <,>. For example:

CIA 3V,REL;CIZ 100;C10 0V

CIA 3V, REL; C1Z 100; and C10 0V are all commands and, ifsent together in one message unit, must be separated by <;>. The3V; 100; and 0V are the first arguments of each of thecommands and must be separated from the command headerwith a space <SP>, equal sign <=> or comma<,>. Multiplearguments have to be separated by <,> (as REL is for the C1Acommand). At the end of the string, a message terminator isrequired. If each command was sent separately, each wouldrequire a message terminator.

Message Terminator: An <END> message must be sent toterminate the message string. An <END> message may take oneof two forms. It may be the EOI bus line asserted true with the

5-2

Page 110: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Command Format

Command Parameters

last data byte (character), or it can be a "Trailer" (End String) character along with the EOI. The generator will alwaysaccept the byte sent with EOI. The trailer must be a semicolon,if used.

Program commands consist of a "Header", which in most casesis followed by parameters (arguments) and/or data (as waveform files).Headers may take either of two forms: Long Form or ShortForm. Long Form Headers are alpha characters and may bemore than one word with underscores separating them. Forexample:

CLOCK SOURCECH1 A~IPLITUDE

Long Form Headers are useful if it is desirable to keep thesource program as near to English language as possible.

Short Form Headers are three-or-four letter acronyms for theLong Form Commands. For example:

CSOU for CLOCK SOURCEC1A for CH1 AIVIPLITUDE

Some Headers qualify as either Long or Short Form. They areHeaders which are not more than four letters long. For example:

GOSTOPARM

Either Long or Short Form Headers will be accepted by thegenerator, and they may be inter-mixed.

Command Parameters (arguments) can be letters, words,numbers or a combination of those. For example:

LOAD ANYWAVE.WAV, 1000

LOAD is the header while ANYWAVE.WAV and 1000 areparameters (arguments).

Command parameters can be one of two types:

Decimal Numeric - Any integer, floating point, or exponentialvalue. Valid characters are 0 through 9, E, <+>, <-> and thedecimal point <.>. Spaces are allowed between the +, - or E andthe digits. This means the 9112 will accept numbers in NR1,NR2, or NR3 representations, as defined by IEEE-728.

Character - Some commands require alpha arguments, such as"ON", "OFF" or file names. These arguments are ASCII strings

5-3

Page 111: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

General Rules:

that start with an alpha character and are followed byalphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9. All othercharacters are not allowed: such as: Space<SP>, <;>, <,>, <#>,underscore < > or delete <DEL>.

The general rules of command format are as follows:

The generator sends and receives command messages in standardASCII code, unless otherwise noted. It sends and receives blocktransfers in any of the forms, 9, 0 or L. All file transfers areblock transfers.

The generator is not case sensitive. It responds equally to upperand lower case alpha characters.

A delimiter is required between a command header and itsparameter, and between parameters. Delimiters are: space,comma, equals and backslash. The 9112 converts "=" to space,and then converts groups of one or more spaces to a singlecomma, and converts comma followed by a group of spaces to asingle comma. For readability, this manual uses underscorebetween the words of a multi-word command header andcomma between parameters.

Semicolon is treated as an end of command delimiter; questionmark is an end of command delimiter for queries.

NOTE: Over GPIB, EOI may be sent with the last character ofa command instead of sending a semicolon. In effect, the EOIcauses a semicolon to be appended to the command if the lastcharacter is not semicolon.

Some examples of the use of delimiters are:

clock_rate, 10MHz; OKclock_rate, 10MHz; OKclock_rate= 10MHz; OKclock rate 10MHz; OKclock rate 10MHz; OKclock_rate? OK (query)clock_rate , 10MHz; wrong: space before commaclock_rate 10 MHz; wrong: space inside the parameterclock_rate; wrong: no parameter but not a query

Errors in message syntax are trapped and can be reported viathe (3PIB. Refer to the section on Error Reporting for details.

GPIB <END> must be received for a command to be processed.

5-4

Page 112: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

IEEE-488 STANDARDMESSAGES

Receiving the DeviceClear Message The generator responds to the Device Clear Message by clearing

any incomplete entries or messages. When addressed to listen, itresponds equally to the Selected Device Clear (SDC) message the device dependent messages CLEAR or (<ESC>C). responds to the Device Clear (DCL) message whether addressedor not.

Receiving theTrigger Message If addressed to listen, the generator responds equally to the

device specific TRIGGER command or to the Group ExecuteTrigger message (GET). In either case it causes the generator (ifin the Single or Burst mode, the trigger is Armed, and the BusTrigger Source is ON) to execute the programmed waveform.

Receiving theRemote Message The remote message has two parts. First the Remote Enable bus

control line (REN) is held true, then the device listen address sent by the controller. These two actions combine to place thegenerator in the Remote mode. The generator must be addressedas a listener before it can start accepting remote messages. Noinstrument settings are changed by the transition from Local toRemote.

Receiving theLocal Message If the generator is addressed to listen, the Go To Local (GTL)

message is used to return it to the Local Mode. Also, if theinstrument is not in the Remote With Lock Out State, pressingthe LOCAL button on the Optional Control Panel will return itto Local Mode.

Receiving the LocalLockout and ClearLocal Lockout/SetLocal Messages Receiving Local Lockout - If the instrument is in remote and

has been addressed as a listener, it will enter the Remote WithLock Out State when it receives the Local Lock Out (LLO)message with ATN true.

Clearing Local Lock Out - The generator will exit the RemoteWith Lock Out State and enter: 1) the Local State if the REN

5-5

Page 113: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

SENDING MESSAGES

line is made false, or 2) the Local With Lock Out State if theGTL message is made true and the generator has been addressedas a listener.

The generator may send device-dependent messages whenaddressed to talk. The instrument remains configured to talkuntil it is unaddressed to talk by the controller. To unaddress thegenerator, the controller must send the generator’s listen address,a new talk address, an IFC message, or a universal untalkcommand.Before the instrument is addressed to talk, the desired outputdata must be specified with an appropriate input message or aquery. Otherwise the instrument will not send anything. TheDIRECTORY or MEMORY commands are examples.

Queries are program commands that end with a question mark(7). The generator responds to the query by outputting a messagecontaining the value or state of the associated parameter.

Queries, when executed, cause their replies to be placed in theoutput buffer. Multiple queries without reading replies will resultin the last reply being written over the previous one.

All output messages are ended with the EOI going true with thelast character sent. Block transfers are formatted according tothe format selected with the COMM_FORMAT command.

RequireService Message The generator sends the Require Service message by setting the

Service Request (SRQ) bus control line true when a previouslyprogrammed condition occurs. The Require Service message iscleared when a Serial Poll is executed by the system controller.During Serial Poll, the SRQ control line is reset as soon as theinstrument places the Main Status Byte message on the bus. If allbits on the Main Status Byte are masked "off", the RequireService message is effectively disabled.

When the generator is sending the Require Service message, thefront-panel SRQ LED lights. The LED is turned off during theserial poll when the SRQ control line is reset.

Serial PollStatus Byte Message After receiving a Serial Poll Enable (SPE) bus command and

when addressed to talk, the generator sends the Main StatusByte Message. The Main Status Byte message consists of one8-bit byte in which the bits are set according to the conditionsthat caused the SRQ.

5-6

Page 114: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

SecondaryStatus Bytes

OPERATION OF THESTATUS BYTES

Bits in the Main Status Byte are set by events (such as error,trigger, etc.). If an event occurs that causes one of the bits inthe Main Status Byte to be set and if that bit is enabled by themask, the RQS (require service) bit is set and the SRQ line settrue.

If the RQS bit is set, indicating that the instrument sent the SRQmessage, and a serial poll is executed, the RQS bit will becleared. All other bits in the Main Status Byte remainunchanged.

Each of the bits in the Main Status Byte (STB 1), except for bit7 which is the RQS bit, is a summary bit for a group ofinstrument events. If more detail is desired about a particulargroup of conditions, there is a Secondary Status Byte for each bitof the Main Status Byte. These Secondary Status Bytes arenumbered STB 2-8. By addressing the generator to listen andsending the query (STB (2 to 8) <?>), and addressing generator to talk, a single byte of 8 bits will be sent. Each bit (orcombination of bits) of that byte will represent a certaininstrument event.

An "event" is the transition from one state to another state. Bitsin the above status bytes are set true by a specified event. Nochange in the 9112 condition can clear these bits, thusguaranteeing that no events are missed by an application. Onlythe STB command, which reads these bytes, can clear them.MAV (message available, STB 6) is a condition bit. It is set trueand false based on the state of the GPIB output buffer.In addition to the status bytes described above, one additionalbyte is a ’condition register’. Bits in this byte are set true andfalse by transitions into and out of 9112 states. There is no wayto write to or clear this byte; it always reflects current conditions.This byte is readable by the command "TSTB,0". Details of thestatus bytes follow.

Each Status Byte has a MASK associated with it. An event isfirst latched in a secondary status byte. If the MASK for thatstatus byte has been set to 1, then the summary bit in the serialpoll status byte is also set. If the MASK for that summary bit isset to 1, then the master status summary bit (shown as bit 6 inFigure 5.1) is also set. If the MASK bit for the master statussummary bit is set to 1, then an SRQ is generated.

An example will make this clear. If we wish to receive an SRQonly when a remote/local transition occurs, we would send the

5-7

Page 115: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

commands MASK 1,65; MASK 2,2. Pressing the local key willcause the following things to happen:

a. Bit 1 of STB 2 will be turned on.

b. Because STB 2 AND’d with MASK 2 is non-zero, bit 0 ofSTB 1 is turned on.

c. Because STB 1 AND’d with MASK 1 is non-zero, bit 6 ofSTB 1 is turned on.

d. Because bit 6 of STB 1 and MASK 1 are both on, an SRQis generated.

A Serial Poll at this point reads the Serial Poll Status Byte andturns off SRQ, Only Serial Poll can turn off SRQ. It does notaffect the contents of STB I. Only the STB command can clearthe event status bytes. TSTB may be used to read the statusbytes without clearing them.

NOTE TO ADVANCED USERS: The above example is actuallymore complex than indicated above, because if REMOTE isasserted (which it typically is) then when the 9112 is addressedto listen so it can receive the STB command, it goes back intoREMOTE! The application program might then do the following:

1. Send REMOTE false.

2. Address the 9112 to listen (there is no need to actually sendanything). This puts the 9112 into local, as the operatorrequested.

3. Wait for SRQ, then serial poll to clear it. Do not send STB.

This returns the 9112 to local and leaves it there. The programcan put the 9112 back into REMOTE by turning on REMOTEand addressing the 9112 to lsiten.

There are other ways to accomplish the above. The methodshown is used by EASYWA VE.

5-8

Page 116: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

MSB

Serial Poll Status Byte (readable, except for the RQS bit, by STB 1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

STF

STB 8 I(self test

fault)

IRQS [ E,~ ,v j Ba,oh I va’ue I °0mode adapt comp

-- STB 5

-- STB 6

LSBstate Ichange

I, -- STB 2

-- STB 3

--- Nothing logically under here. Thisbit will track the Execution Errorbit in the ESR (STB 7). However,we use STB 4 to hold a numericerror. See description below.

-- STB 7

Figure 5.1

command string action or response

STB? responds with 8 status bytes (I to 8)or and clears all 8 status bytes

STB

STB n? responds with STB n,xx (n=l to 8)or where xx is the value of the status byte and

STB n clears STB n. (except INTERNAL STATE)

MASK n? responds with MASK n,xx (n=l to 8)or where xx is the value of the status byte mask

MASK n,xx sets MASK n (n=l to 8) to the given value

TSTB n? responds as for STB n<cr> but does not clearor the status byteTSTB

MASK?or

MASK

responds with 8 mask bytes (1 to 8)unused mask bytes show as 0values are returned in ASCII (default decimal)separated by commas

5-9

Page 117: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Table 5.1Status Bytes Bit Assignments

EVENT REGISTERSSTB 2: readable by STB 2?

bit 0 = No files found at power on, file system relnltlallzedbit 1 remote to local or local to remote transition occurredbit 2 = Channel 1 overload occurredbit 3 = Channel 2 overload occurredbit 4 = Triggered (In a triggered mode only)bit 5 unusedbit 6 = unusedbit 7 = unused

STB 3: readable by STB 3?bit 0 = operation completebits 7-1 = unused

STB 5: readable by STB 5?bit 0 = batch (sequence or setup) file execution Initiatedbit 1 unusedbit 2 = batch execution ended normally, i.e., at END statementbit 3 = WAITIng for NEXTbit 4 = batch execution terminated before ENDbit 5 = batch single stepbits 7, 6 = spare, always 0

STB 7: readable by STB 7?Thls Is the standard Event Status Registerblt 0 = Operation Completebit I = unusedblt 2 = unusedblt 3 = unusedblt 4 = Exeoutlon error (Warnlng)bit 5 Command error (unrecognlzed command, etc.)bit 6 = unusedbit 7 = Power on

STB 8: readable by STB 8?bit 0 = analog board problem, see CALERR filebit 1 high speed memory problembit 2 = control memory problembit 3 = Nonvolatile memory problembit 4 = transfer from high speed memory to analog board failedbit 7,6,5 = unused

CONDITION REGISTERSSTB 0: readable by TSTB 0? This Is not an event register, but a condition register. It does

not generate SRQs.bits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unusedbit 1 = batch execution In progressbit = waveform activebit ~ armed

STB 4: readable by STB 4?bits 7-0 = error code (Table 5.2)The MASK 4 command wlllparse but has no effectThe appropriate bits of STB7 are always set on error

STB 6: readable by STB 6?bit 0 = message availablebits 7-1 = unused

5-10

Page 118: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

I* command parse errors */10 too many parameters11 Invalid header12 Invalid number format13 Invalid keyword14 Invalid block15 two strings In omd16 Invalid symbol17 invalid trailer18 Invalid acronym19 syntax error

20 command permission error30 option not Installed40 semantic error41 command not found

Table 5.2

Error Codes

Example: Chl_Ampl 1V, 2V;

Example: Chl Ampl, 1.2.3V;An alpha argument was not recognizedNot #9, #L or #0

Short form command not recognizedGeneral problem parsing command(No way to get this error)(No way to get this error)

I* environment errors - requested action not possible In current state */5O5152535455567O71728O9O100110120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141

environment errorreceived trigger command In nontrlggered modereceived arm In nontrlggered modereceived go with no trigger source enabled In a triggered modesegment less than 72 points in triggered mode (can only run in CONTINUOUS trigger mode)received trigger and not armedreceived trigger arm when not readycommunications errorunrecognized gplb bus cmdunrecognized escape sequencefunction errorbatch mode errorcmd not implementedunclassified errorfile accounting errorCannot add another directory entry to file memoryCannot add another directory entry to system memoryCannot add another directory entry to high speed memoryCannot add another line to control memoryfile memory space exceededsystem memory space exceededhigh speed memory space exceededControl memory space exceededfile nesting level exceeded (for sequence, setup files)file specification errorInvalid deviceInvalid extensionInvalid fllenamereserved fllenameaddress out of rangemissing fllenamemissing extensionmissing devicefile field delimiterfile handling errorno waveform loaded

5-11

Page 119: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

142143144145146147148149150160

failed to find segmentfile already existsno file foundfile does not existoannot olose filemissing end of fileIncompatible wav wad files - tried to link wav, wad filesshort segments not Ilnkable - tried to link ug < 72 pointsstandard function command error - error unique to standard funotlonsself test error

/* Calibration errors */170 calibration aborted - measurement system or signal DAC non-funotlonal. Your 9112 will be either

significantly out of calibration or nonfunotlonal.

171 amplitude not achelvable - Not aotually a oallbratlon error. Using the ourrent caUbratlon constants,the requested amplitude cannot be aohelved.

172 offset not achelvable - similar to 171, but for offset. Note: If offset Is set to more than 1/2amplitude, this error may result. If offset > amplitude, this error will result.

173 cal completed with errors - something was out of speolfloatlon. Note: Thoroughly unreasonablemeasurements are replaced with default values, so as not to "hide" problems, or disable a unit with abad measurement circuit.

181 dual wavaform of less than 72 points.

182 dual waveform not loaded.

NOTE:

200

201202

203

204205

255

Error numbers greater than 200 are warningswarning default units - specifying a value for Hertz, Volts, or seconds without any extension. Thebase unit (le, Hertz, Volts, or seoonds) Is used. For example: CRAT,10; gives a 10 Hertz clock.

warning adjusted wave file - File padded to multiple of 8 bytes to meet restrictions of 9112 hardware.

Warning: signal beyond 5 V.Warning: no trigger delay oontrol allowed In standard mode pulse

Warning: no clock control in Standard Funotlon Mode.

Warning: no clock rate control while Clock Source Is External.

unolasslfled warning - a warning for which no more speolflo error coda has been created yet.

5-12

Page 120: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

ACRONYMGUIDELINES Single Words: Long form words of four letters or less: The word

is used in its entirety.

If the word is over four letters, the first three or four letters areused. Where conflicts arise between words, exceptions are made.For example, ID, SING, RCL, TGR, CM, STR.

Two Words: Generally, the first letter of the first word, plus thefirst three letters of the second word. Exceptions are made forclarity and to prevent conflicts. There are four categories ofexceptions:

a. The first two letters of the first word and the first two lettersof the second word are used when there are conflicts.

b. CH1 and CH2 acronyms are shortened for clarity.

c. COMM acronyms are kept consistent with LeCroy DigitalOscilloscopes.

d. DELE, DELT use the first four letters.

Three Words: The first letter of each word is used, for instanceHSM, RAM.

5-13

Page 121: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Table $.3

9112 GPIB Acronyms

ACRONYM MEANING ACRONYM MEANING ACRONYM MEANING

AFUN ARBITRARY FUNCTION ID IDENTIFY 8TB STATUS BYTEARB ARBITRARY IFC INTERFACE CLEAR STOP STOPABO ABORT INC INCREMENT 8TR STOREAFIL ACTIVE FILES INT INTERNAL TAB TRIG ARM 8RCE.ALT ALTERNATE INTL INTERLEAVEARM ARM LEARN LEARN SETUP TDEL TRIG DELAYAUTO AUTO LINK LINK TGR TRIGGERBOTH BOTH LLO LOCAL LOCKOUT TLEV TRIG LEVELBUR BURST LOAD LOAD TMOD TRIG MODEBUS BUS LOC

LONGLOCAL TRFR TRIANGLE FREQ.

C1A LONGC1D

CH1 AMPLITUDEMAN TRI TRIANGLEMASK

MANUALCll

CHI_-DIGITAL_WORDTRIM TRIANGLE MODE

MDELMASK

C1LCH1 INVERT

MARKER DELAYC 10

CH1-LOAD COMPMEM TRIP TRIANGLE PHASEMODE

MEMORYC 1P

CH 1 _-OFFS[’TMODE TRRP TRIANGLE REL. PHASE

C1ZCH1 _OUTPUTCHI_ZERO_REF NEG NEGATIVE TSLO TRIG SLOPE

C2A NEXT NEXTC2D

CH2 AMPLITUDE TSOU TRIG SOURCEC21

CH2"DIGITAL WORD OFFON

OFF TSTB TEST STATUS BYTEC2L

CH2_-INVERT-CH2_LOAD COMP PDEL

ONPULSE_DELAY UFIX UNSIGNED FIXED

C20 CH2_OFFSET POPT PULSE_OPTIMIZE USHO UNSIGNED SHORTC2P CH2_OUTPUT VIEW VIEW SETTING8C2Z CH2 ZERO REF.

PO8 POSITWE

CAL PPER PULSE PERIOD WAIT WAIT

CBLSCALI"BRATE-COMM_BLOCKSIZE PTS POINTS [ESC]A ABORT

CFMTPUL PULSE [ESC]C DEV. CLEAR

CHDRCOMM_FORMAT PWID PULSE WIDTH [ESC]L LOCAL

CLECOMM_HEADERCLEAR RAM RAM DISK MEMORY [ESC]N NEXT

CLEV CLOCK LEVEL RAMP RAMP [ESC]R REMOTECM CONTROL_MEMORY RCEI RECEIVE

[ESC]S STB?CMOD RCL RECALL

TRIGGERCPER

CLOCK_MODECLOCK_PERIOD REC RECURRENT [ESC]T

DISABLE RS-232 XON/XOFFCPRM REL RELATIVE [ESC](

HANDSHAKECRAT

COMM_PROMPT REM REMOTECREF

CLOCKRATECLOCK_REFERENCE REP REPEAT [ESC]) ENABLE R8-232 XON/XOFF

[ESC][HANDSHAKE

CSLO CLOCK SLOPE RMOD RAMP MODE R8-232 ECHO OFFCSOU CLOCK_SOURCE RMPP RAMP PHASE

[ESC]] RS-232 ECHO ONCON CONTINUOUS RPRP RAMP REL. PHASE

[ESC] [1-7] SUBSTB?CONC CONCATENATE RIMER RAMP PERIODCSDE RPOL RAMP POLARITY [EBC] [CNTL] C CLEAR

CTRLCOMM_STRDELIMCOMM_TRAILER R823 R8-232 PORT [CNTL]R REPEAT LAST CMD

DCSC1PSC2P

SINE_CHI_PHASE WAV WAVE SINGLE CHDCL

D.C,DEVICE CLEAR

SINE CH2 PHASE8ELE~TIV~ DEV CLR WAD

DCMD8DC

DECD.C. M~)DEDECREMENT 8EQ SEQUENCE

DELE SEND SENDDELT

DELETEDELTA SET

81FRSETUP

DIR DIRECTORY SINE FREQ,DMOD DELAY MODE SINE

SMODSINE

DUAL DUAL SINE MODE

END SING SINGLEEXIST

ENDEXIST SHORT SHORT

EXT EXTERNAL SQFR SQUARE FREQ.FUNC FUNCTION QUERY 8QMD SQUARE MODEGATE SQUP SQUARE PHASEGO

GATEGO SQRP SQUARE REL. PHASE

GPIB GPIB 8QU SQUAREHS HIGH SPEED MEM SEL 8ELFTEST

STAN STANDARD FUNC.STAT STATUS

WAVE DUAL CH

5-14

Page 122: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

PROGRAMMING COMMANDS SECTIONThe following is a description of each of the programming commands for the LeCroy 9100Series Arbitrary Function Generators. The command set is divided into eight main categories.They are:

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

File Handling CommandsAction CommandsChannel Parameter CommandsTimebase CommandsTrigger CommandsStandard Function CommandsQuery Type CommandsCommunication Commands

LeCROY 9100 SERIES COMMAND SET

Section 1 FILE HANDLING COMMANDS

DELETE (DELE)END (END)EXIST (see Query Type) (no short form - EXIS recognized)LEARN SETUP (LEARN)LINK (I~INK)LOAD (LOAD)NEXT (NEXT)RECALL (RCL)SETUP (SET)SEQUENCE (SEQ)STORE (STR)WAIT (WAIT) (see Action Type)

see also ACTIVE FILES (AFIL) (see Query Type)DIRECTORY (DIR) (see Query Type)MEMORY (MEN) (see Query Type)

Section 2 ACTION COMMANDS

ABORT (ABO)ARBITRARY (ARB)ARM (ARM)CALIBRATE (CAL)CLEAR (CLE)GO (GO)NEXT (NEXT)SELFTEST (SEL)STOP (STOP)TRIGGER (TGR)

5-15

Page 123: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Section 3 CHANNEL PARAMETER COMMANDS

CH1 AMPLITUDE (C1A) CH2 AMPLITUDE (C2A)CH1-DIGITAL WORD (C1) CH2_DIGITAL_WORD (C2D)CHI_INVERT (-CII) CH2 INVERT (C2I)CHI_OFFSET (C10) CH2_OFFSET (C20)CHI_OUTPUT (C1P) CH2 OUTPUT (C2P)CH1 ZERO REF (C1Z) Cfi2 ZERO REF (C2Z)CH I~LOAD-_COMP (C 1L) CH2_LOAD_COMP (C2L)

Section 4 TIMEBASE COMMANDSCLOCK_LEVEL (CLEV)CLOCK_MODE (CMOD)CLOCK_PERIOD (CPER)CLOCK_RATE (CRAW)CLOCK_REFERENCE (CREF)CLOCK_SLOPE (CSLO)CLOCK_SOURCE (CSOU)

Section 5 TRIGGER COMMANDS

DELAY MODE (DMOD)MARKER DELAY (MDEL)TRIG ARM SOURCE (TAS)TRIG-_DELAY (TDEL)TRIG_LEVEL (TLEV)TRIG_SLOPE (TSLO)TRIG_MODE (TMOD)TRIGSOURCE (TSOU)

Section 6 STANDARD FUNCTION COMMANDS

STANDARD (STAN)SINE (SINE)SINE_MODE (SMOD)SINE_FREQUENCY (SIFR)SINE_CH 1_PHASE (SC1P)SINE CH2 PHASE (SC2P)SQUARE (SQU)SQUARE_MODE (SQMD)SQUARE_FREQUENCY (SQFR)SQUARE_PHASE (SQUP)SQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASE (SQRP)TRIANGLE (TRI)TRIANGLE_FREQUENCY (TRFR)TRIANGLE_MODE (TRIM)TRIANGLE_PHASE (TRIP)TRIANGLE_RELATIVE_PHASE (TRRP)RAMP (RAMP)RAMP_MODE (RMOD)

5-16

Page 124: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

RAMP_PERIOD (RPER)RAMP._PHASE (RMPP)RAMP RELATIVE PHASE (RPRP)PULSE- (PUL) PULSE_WIDTH (PWID)PULSE_PERIOD (PPER)PULSE_DELAY (PDEL)PULSE OPTIMIZE (POPT)DC (DE)DC MODE (DCMD)DC~_VOLTS (DC1)

Section 7 QUERY TYPE COMMANDS

ACTIVE FILES (AFIL)DIRECTORY (DIR)EXIST (EXIS)FUNCTION (FUNC)IDENTIFY (ID)MEMORY (MEM)VIEW (VIEW)

Section 8 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS

COMM_BLOCKSIZE (CBLS)COMM_FORMAT (CFMT)COMM HEADER (CHDR)MASKSTBTSTB

DC2_VOLTS (DC2)

5-17

Page 125: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

FILE HANDLING COMMANDS

Flle Structures There are four types of files which the generator accepts. Theyare Setup and Sequence, Single waveform, and Dual Waveform.The structures for these files are described below. All files aretransmitted over the bus in block format; waveforms use #A or#L formats, setup and sequence files use #0 format.BLOCKS - Blocks are used to transfer waveform files, setupfiles or sequence files to and from the 9112. Block formats(except for #L) are described in the IEEE Std. 488.2-1987.Three block formats can be received:

NOTE: For all formats, the count and data must be of the sameform.

BLOCK FORMAT 9 - GPIB only, binary only, no checksum

For Binary Transfer:

Byte Number Byte Value1 # (ASCII #)2 9 (ASCII 9)3-11 9 ASCII characters containing the file’s

byte count (2 times the word count),(i.e., 2N for an N point waveform)

12 <data word 1, low byte>13 <data word 1, high byte>14 <data word 2, low byte>15 <data word 2, high byte>

Q

Q

2N+10 <data word N, low byte>2N+ 11 <data word N, high byte> with EOI,

if last block)*

* EOI, if sent, must be sent with the last byte. EOI terminatesthe file tansfer. If EOI is not sent, the 9112 will accept anotherblock as part of the same file. The last block of a file transfermust be sent with EOI on the last byte.

BLOCK FORMAT 0 - The #0 format begins with the characters"#0", followed by any number of ASCII characters, the last ofwhich must be sent with EOI asserted (the standard GPIB ENDmessage).

5-18

Page 126: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

BLOCK FORMAT L - OPIB or RS-232, ASCII text only.

For HEX ASCII Transfer:

Byte Number1234567891011121314

Byte Value# (ASCII #)L (ASCII uppercase L)<value count, 4th hex digit, most significant >*<vaue count, 3rd hex digit>*<value count, 2nd hex digit>*<value count, 1st hex digit, least significant>*<data word 1,<data word 1,<data word 1,<data word 1,<data word 2,<data word 2,<data word 2,<data word 2,

4th hex digit, most significant>3rd hex digit>2nd hex digit>1st hex digit, least significant >4th hex digit>3rd hex digit>2nd hex digit>1st hex digit>

Setup and Sequence Files

Setup Files

4N+3 <data word N, 4th hex digit>4N+4 <data word N, 3rd hex digit>4N+5 <data word N, 2nd hex digit>4N+6 <data word N, 1st hex digit> (with EOI,

if last block) *

¯ Value count is number of data values you are sending over inthis block. In this hex ASCII representation there are 4 bytesper data value.

¯ *The EOI, if sent, must be sent with the last byte of the block.EOI terminates the file tansfer. If EOI is not sent, the 9112 willaccept another block as part of the same file. The last block of afile transfer must be sent with EOI on the last byte. OverRS-232, the last byte is followed by the character defined byCOMM RS CONF as simulating EOI; see Chapter 6.

The generator will accept both Setup and Sequence files in the"#0" block transfer format. These files may be thought of as"batch" files. The only difference between the files is the kind ofinstructions they contain.

The Setup file should never contain any instructions other thanvalid instrument setup commands. These are the commandswhich setup the instrument parameters such as Amplitude, Clockand Trigger. An example of a Setup file, as the generator wouldreceive it from the bus, is shown below:

5-19

Page 127: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

160

170180

’FOR THIS EXAMPLE, THE NAME OF THE FILE IS"TESTPROG.SET"; A SETUP FILE

NAM$="TESTPROG. SET"

Executing Setup File

Sequence Files

310

320330340350

360

370

38O390400

410420430

440450460

470

480

’THE FIRST 2 BYTES OF ALL SETUP AND SEQUENCEFILES ARE "#0"

INIT$="#0"t

’THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS ARE A SETUP FILETHAT CHANGES THE AMPLITUDE OF’CHANNEL ONE TO 5 VOLTS, CHANNEL TWO TO 2VOLTS,’TURNS OFF LOAD COMPENSATION ON CHANNEL 1AND CHANNEL 2, AND MAKES THE CLOCK PERIOD’EQUAL TO 100 nsec PER POINT(10 MHz)

COMMAND$="CIA,5V; C2A,2V;C1L, OFF; C2L, OFF;CPER, 1.00E-007;"

COMM$=INIT$+COMMAND$

’ WE WILL NOW SEND THE FILENAME AND DATA TOTHE 9112

HEAD$="STORE "+NAM$CALL IBWRT(AFG%,HEAD$) ’write string HEADS to theAFG

CALL IBWRT(AFG%,COMM$) ’write string COMM$ to theAFG

ENDSample BASICA program for transferring a setup file.

The STORE is the command that will cause the setup file to bestored in the generator’s file storage area (RAM Disk). TheTESTPROG.SET is the file name, with the .SET identifying it asa setup file. The #0 identifies the type of block transfer that is tooccur. Note that none of these items are a part of the Setupfile. It is the rest of the data that is the Setup file.

NOTE: The end shown is not GPIB END, it is the end requiredto close the file.

The setup file above, once in the 9112 RAM memory, would beexecuted with the command SETUP TESTPROG.SET;.

A Sequence File, like a Setup File, can be executed by theLeCroy 9112 simply by invoking the filename. However, unlikea Setup file, a Sequence file can contain Setup files nestedwithin the Sequence file itself. In this respect, a Sequence isreally a more global file type than a Setup file. The Sequencefile can contain any valid 9112 GPIB command, also a WAIT

5-20

Page 128: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

statement. It can even include Setup files. An example of aSequence file follows:

160 ’FOR THIS EXAMPLE, THE NAME OF THE FILE IS"TESTPROG.SEQ"; A SEQUENCE FILE

170180 NAM$=’TESTPROG. SEQ"190

310

320330340350

360

370

380390

400410420

430440450

460

470

’THE FIRST 2 BYTES OF ALL SETUP AND SEQUENCEFILES ARE "#0"

INIT$="#0"

’THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS ARE A SEQUENCEFILE THAT ABORTS THE WAVEFORM BEINGGENERATED, IF ANY, CHANGES CHANNEL 1AMPLITUDE’TO 5 VOLTS, LOADS A NEW WAVEFORM, REPEATSIT ONCE ON’EVERY TRIGGER, AND OUTPUTS THAT WAVEFORMFROM THE 9112.

COMMAND$="ABORT; CIA,5V; TMOD,SING;LOAD, SIN100.WAV, 1; GO; END;"

COMM$=INITS+COMMAND$

’ WE WILL NOW SEND THE FILENAME AND DATA TOTHE 9112

HEAD$="STORE "+NAM$CALL IBWRT(AFG%,HEAD$) ’ wriles string HEADS to theAFGCALL IBWRT(AFG%,COMM$) ’ writes string COMM$ the AFG

ENDSample BASICA program for transferring a sequence file.

The STORE command causes this sequence file to be stored intothe generator’s RAM Disk. The .SEQ extension identifies it as aSequence file. The #0 sets the block transfer format. The rest isthe actual Sequence file. This program example includes setupcommands combined with a load operation. The commandLOAD SIN100.WAV1 causes a waveform to be loaded from theRAM Disk to the high speed memory. The number 1 specifiesthe number of times the waveform is to be repeated.

The GO causes the generator to execute the waveformSIN100.WAV.

The END closes the file and leaves the instrument in the lastsetup state with the waveform running.

5-21

Page 129: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Executing of Sequence File

Single Waveform Files

The sequence file above, once resident in 9112 RAM can beexecuted with the command, SEQUENCE TESTPROG.SEQ;.

A Single Waveform File is one that will run only on Channel 1.It is received over the bus in the #9 or #L block format. Anexample of the Single Waveform File format sent by an IBMBASICA program is below:

700 HEADERS=" STORE "+NAMES+" .WAV"710 ’720 ’730 REM THE NEXT LINE PUTS THE DATA INTO AFORMAT THE 9112 CAN UNDERSTAND. IT FIRST SEES"#9", THEN 9 BYTES WHICH DEFINE THE LENGTH OFTHE WAVE IN BYTES, AND THEN THE WAVEFORMDATA WITH AN EOI.740 ’750 ’760 REM ADD SPACES TO FILL 9 CHARACTERS770 FILLS=" "

780 FOR I=1 TO 6790 IF LEN(WAVE$) 10^I GOTO 810800 FILLS = FILLS+ ....810 NEXT I820 OUTWAVE$="#9"+FILL$+STR$ (LEN(WAVE$))+WAVE$830 CALL IBWRT(ARB%,HEADER$)840 CALL IBWRT(ARB%,OUTWAVE$)850 PRINT "WAVEFORM TRANSFER COMPLETED"

where: the 9 ASCII characters following the "#9" encode the filelength.

WAVES contains binary data bytes.

STORE is the command to save the file to the 9112 RAMMemory.

NAMES contains the file name The .WAV extension mustalways be used to signify a Single Waveform File.

#9 specifies the block format. The #9 and the size characters arenot part of the file. The file contains only the binary data. Thefile can be up to 65,536 bytes (32,768 words or points) long.

Dual Waveform Files A Dual Waveform File is composed of waveform data forChannel 1 and Channel 2. The 9112 stores these files internallywith .WAD extensions to the filename in order to delineatebetween Single and Dual Waveforms.

5-22

Page 130: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Executing Waveform Files

The 9112 accepts only interleaved dual waveform data files.This is due to the internal memory accessing architecture of theinstrument.

An example of an interleaved Dual Channel Waveform, as it isreceived over the bus, follows:

STORETESTWAVE.WAD; (EOI)#9C 1C2...C9]A 1 {B 1 IA21 a21 .......An{Bn I EOI

C1-C9 are ASCII characters decoding the file size. A1 to Anare Channel 1 binary data words, least significant byte first. B1to Bn are Channel 2 binary data words. STORE is the commandwhich causes the file to be stored into the 9112 RAM Memory.

TESTWAVE.WAD is the filename. The .WAD extension mustalways be used to indicate a Dual Channel Waveform.

#9 specifies the block transfer format and is not part of the file,nor are the bytes which represent the file size characters. Onlythe binary data is a part of the file. The file may be 65,536bytes (32,768 words or points) long.

Observe that the data bytes are interleaved one word at a time.A1 for Channel 1, then B1 for Channel 2, then A2 for Channel1, then B2 for Channel 2, etc. There must be an equal numberof words for Channel 1 (A) and for Channel 2 (B).

Dual Waveform Files are received over the bus in the #9 or #Lblock format.

NOTE: A waveform file may be sent as more than one physicalblock. If the last character of an #9 block is not sent with EOI(the GPIB END message), then another block may be sent.

Both dual and single waveform files are executed by using LOADTHISWAV.WAV; or LOAD TESTWAV.WAD; followed by aGO; command. Optionally, additional WAV files may beLINKED to WAV files or WAD files to WAD files.

5-23

Page 131: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

FILE HANDLING COMMANDS

File Handling

Causes the named file to be deleted from the RAM Disk.

FORMAT:

DELETE argDELE arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

Any valid Setup, Sequence, or Waveform filename (with extension).

DELETE

(DELE)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

DELETE MYFILE.SEQ;DELE MYFILE.SEQ;

COMMENTS

The file named MYFILE.SEQwill be deleted from the RAMDisk.

NOTES: No query form of this command.

5-24

Page 132: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling END

The command END must be included at the end of a sequence or setup batch file. While ENDis not a valid GPIB command, its query form, "END?", is. END? is used to debug batch fileexecution problems. This query returns either "NOT BATCH END STATUS AVAILABLE" ifno setup or sequence file has been run, or a list of the following form.

LEVEL FILENAME.EXT LINE<CR><LF>0 SET1 .SET 53<CR><LF>

Levels are in the range of 0 to 5. Line numbers start at 1. If line number shows 0, then batchexecution ended before the first command from that file was executed. Line number increasesby one with each command fetched.

The last file in the list is the one which was running when batch execution was terminated.Normally, there will only be one file shown in the list (level 0); batch execution is ended by the"END;" command at the end of that file. Batch execution is terminated on any error, or onremote/local change. In these cases, if batch files were nested (i.e., A.SEQ contained thecommand "SEQUENCE B.SEQ;’), then the list would contain more than one file name.

FORMAT:

END?

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

END?

COMMENTS

issued at power-upresponse:LEVEL FILENAME.EXT LINE<CR><LF>

0 CLEARCMD.SYS 87<CR><LF>

5-25

Page 133: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

File Handling LEARN_SETUP(LEARN)

When this command is received, all the present instrument settings (parameters) are saved to filename specified (the extension of which must always be .SET).

FORMAT:

LEARN SETUP filename.SET

VALID FILENAMES:

Any combination of alphanumeric characters. (no symbols)

DEFAULTS:

Unspecified Argument: if no filename is specified, then a universal filename willautomatically be supplied. It will be of the form: SETXXX.SET, where XXX is asequential number managed by the generator.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

LEARN SETUP ANYWAVE.SET;LEARN ANYWAVE.SET;

LEARN_SETUP;

LEARN;

NOTES: No query form of this command.

COMMENTS

The present generator settingsare saved into a file namedANYWAVE.SET

Since no filename is specified,the settings will be saved to afile named SETI.SET.

5-26

Page 134: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling LINK

This command causes the specified waveform to be added to the high speed memory, starting atthe end of the last waveform previously LOADED or LINKED. The LINK command may not beused unless one waveform has been previously LOADED. Single waveforms (.WAV) cannot linked to dual waveforms (.WAD) or visa versa. In the event a waveform is linked a multiplenumber of times it is not duplicated in high speed memory (HSM). This allows extremelycomplex waveforms to be made up of much simpler individual waveforms which can be usedmultiple times. Additionally, this feature can be used to gain even larger apparent HSM byspecifying a repetition count for each linked waveform.

The "WAIT" argument, if present, tells the 9112 AFG to wait for trigger before executing thissegment. More precisely, it tells the AFG to act as if the entire waveform ended with thesegment before this one, and this segment is the first one in the next waveform repetition. See"Specifying the Trigger Mode" in Chapter 3 for details on the effect of "WAIT" in each triggermode.

FORMAT:

LINK argl [arg2] [arg3];

where optional items are contained in brackets, and items to be replaced are in lowercase.

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: filename to link, with extension, such as A.WAD

arg2: number between 1 and 4095 inclusive representing the segment repetitioncount. Default if not present is 1.

arg3: WAIT. The presence of this argument indicates a pause or wait state beforethe waveform described by the filename in arg 1 will be output. The default,if "WAIT" is not present, is not to wait. Only the "W" is required. Thepresence of an argument in this position not beginning with "W" generates errorcode 16, invalid symbol.

DEFAULTS:

EXAMPLE:

Number of repetitions:l, no wait

COMMAND

LINK NEWWAVE.WAV, 300;

COMMENTS

Requires "LOADED" waveform,see LOAD. 9112 linksNEWWAVE.WAV at nextdata point after end of presentfile contained in high speedmemory. It also sets up thisindividual waveform to berepeated 300 times. Thus, thecomposite wave created from

5-27

Page 135: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

LOAD ANYFILE.WAV(illustrated at LOAD) andNEWWAVE.WAV repeats thefirst wave segment 100 times andthe second wave segment 300times for each single repetitionof the composite waveform.

NOTES:

1. No query form of this command.

2. Minimum size of a wave that will be linked to other waveforms (or to have other waveformslinked to it is) is 72 bytes. This is 36 points of a single waveform or 18 points of a dualwave form.

5-28

Page 136: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling LOAD

Causes a specified waveform to be moved from the storage memory (RAM Disk) to the highspeed memory (HSM). It is used for both Single and Dual Waveforms. The number of timesthe waveform must be repeated should be specified (not to exceed 4,095). If no specification given, the generator will default to one.

This command must be issued at least once before issuing a GO command to execute thewaveform.

FORMAT:

LOAD argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: Any waveform filename (.WAV or .WAD)

arg2: The number of repetitions for the waveform

DEFAULT:

Number of repetitions: 1

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

LOAD ANYFILE.WAV, 100; Moves the file namedANYFILE.WAV from theRAM memory to the HighSpeed Memory. It also sets upthe Control Memory to repeatthe waveform 100 times.

NOTES:

1. No query form of this command.

2. Minimum size of a waveform that will have waveforms linked to it is 72 bytes. This is 36points of a single waveform or 18 points of a dual waveform.

5-29

Page 137: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

File Handling RECALL

(RCL)

Causes the generator to send the contents of the specified file. The format will depend on thetype of file being sent. If it is a Waveform file (.WAV or .WAD) it will be format #9, and willalways be interleaved when a dual waveform file. If it is a Setup or Sequence file the format willbe #0 (see the section on file structures).

FORMAT:

RECALL arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

Any valid Setup, Sequence, or Waveform filename (with extension).

EXAMPLE COMMAND COMMENTS

RECALL MYFILE.WAD Sends the entire contents of thewaveform file named"MYFILE.WAD". It will be informat #9, and the data will beinterleaved (see the FileStructure section).

NOTES:

1. No query form of this command.

2. Over RS-232, waveform files are sent in #L format.

5-30

Page 138: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling SEQUENCE

(SEQ)

This command causes the named Sequence file to execute. A Sequence file can contain mostvalid 9112 specific GPIB commands including the Setup and Sequence, but not NEXT or anyquery. Setup/Sequence files can be nested to a depth of five. The last command in a sequencefile must be "END";. All commands within a sequence file should be terminated with asemicolon <;>.

FORMAT:

SEQUENCE arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

Any 8 character or less file name with the .SEQ extension

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SEQUENCE ANYFILE.SEQ;

SEQ ANYFILE.SEQ;

Initiates a sequence file inthe 9112.

NOTES:

1. After execution of a sequence or setup file, the query command "END?" can be used todetermine which line (starting at 1) was the last fetched from (each of the possibly up five levels of nested) sequence file when execution ended.

2. The individual commands in a sequence file do not generate op complete status.

3. The NEXT command, from GPIB, does generate op complete status. While the 9112 isexecuting a sequence file it will not parse other GPIB commands; the immediate actioncommand <ESC S> may be used instead of "STB?" to read the status bytes while asequence is in progress. (See Table 5.3).

4. The immediate action command <ESC A> will abort sequence~setup file execution if any; ifnone it will abort generation of the current waveform.

5. No query form of this command.

5-31

Page 139: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

File Handling SETUP

(SET)

Causes the named setup file to be executed. This configures the LeCroy 9112 as defined by theSetup file. The setup file must be resident in the 9112 RAM Disk Memory. The last commandin a setup file must be "END;".

FORMAT:

SETUP arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

Any filename with the extension .SET, resident in the RAM Disk Memory.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

SETUP FILENAME.SET;SET FILENAME.SET;

COMMENTS

Sends a file from RAM to the9112 hardware containing allof the instrument settings asdefined in a file namedFILENAME.SET.

NOTES:

1. After execution of a sequence or setup file, the query command "END?" can be used todetermine which line (starting at 1) was the last fetched from (each of the possibly up five levels of nested) sequence file when execution ended.

2. The first line in a setup file automatically learned by the 9112 is the response to the query"FUNCTION?". This is for information only.

3. LEARN creates setup files containing the current setup. See LEARN.

4. No query form of this command.

5-32

Page 140: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling STORE

(STR)

Causes Waveform, Setup, or Sequence files to be moved from the GPIB to the generator’sinternal RAM Disk (storage memory). This step must precede executing a file. Setup Sequence files may be executed only after being stored. Likewise, waveform files may be loadedinto high speed memory only after having been stored. All file transfers are block format.

FORMAT:

STORE arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

filename.SET (for Setups)

filename.SEQ (for Sequence)

filename.WAV (for Single Waveforms)

filename.WAD (for Dual Waveforms)

VALID DATA BLOCKS:

1. #9 or #L for both types of waveform files

2. #0 for Setup and Sequence files (see the beginning of this section on file structures)

NOTE: For information on how to configure #9, #L and #0 formats see Section 5.1.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

STORE MYFILE.WAD; Stores MYFILE.WAD, whichis two waveforms interleavedtogether, into file storage space(RAM memory). EOI must asserted with the semicolon. Theblock of data must followimmediately.

NOTES: No query form of this command.

5-33

Page 141: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

ACTION COMMANDS

Action Command ABORT

(ABO)

Stops the waveform currently being generated immediately without waiting for completion of thecurrent repetition.

FORMAT:

ABORT

EXAMPLE:

NOTES:

I.

2.

COMMAND

ABORT;ABO; or <ESC> A;

COMMENTS

Stops the generation of waveformfile(s) in the high speedmemory.

<ESC>A aborts sequence~setup file execution if any; if none it aborts waveform generation.

No query form of this command.

5-34

Page 142: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command ARBITRARY

(ARB)

Selects arbitrary function mode. If a standard function was being generated it is aborted. Inarbitrary mode you have explicit control over the 9112’s clock. In this mode you can LOADand LINK files from the 9112’s file system into its high speed operating memory for generation.

FORMAT:

ARBITRARYARB

EXAMPLE:

NOTES:

1.

2.

COMMAND

ARB;

The LOAD command forces ARBITRARY mode.

Query will respond with an argument of "ON" or "OFF".

COMMENTS

Select arbitrary function mode.

5-35

Page 143: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Action Command ARM

Used in conjunction with the TRIGGER ARM SOURCE BUS command to arm the trigger fromthe bus. If TAS BUS is already active, invoking the ARM command causes the trigger circuits tobe enabled to accept the next trigger.

FORMAT:

ARM

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

ARM; If the generator TAS wasBUS, then the triggercircuits would be enabledfor the next trigger signal.

NOTES: To Query the state of ARM use TSTB O. See Table 5.1.

5-36

Page 144: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command CALIBRATE

(CAL)

Causes the generator to initiate a calibration cycle. A CAL cycle occurs automatically atpower-up and whenever requested using this command. It is also executed as part of aSELFTEST command cycle. Calibrate writes a file into the 9112 file memory, CALERR.SEQ.This file contains plain text documenting any errors (or the lack of errors) in the lastCALIBRATE. This file may be recalled at any time.

FORMAT:

CALIBRATE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

CAL; The next time the waveformis stopped or aborted, thegenerator will initiate theself-calibration routine.

NOTES:

1. CALERR.SEQ is not actually a SEQUENCE file. It is plain text, like a sequence file.Attempting to run it as a sequence file has no effect.

2. No Query form of this command.

5-37

Page 145: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Action Command CLEAR

(CLE)

Resets all instrument settings to the power-up defaults, (see the section on power-up settings).

FORMAT:

CLEAR

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

CLEAR;CLEA;

COMMENTS

Causes the generator to reset allits settings to the power-updefaults.

NOTES:

I. The [SHIFT] RESET key on the 9100/CP executes this command.

2. No Query form of this command.

."CLEAR FM" will clear file memory. All files of all types are deleted by this command.This is a completely different function than "CLEAR" without an argument and wasoriginally for internal use only. However, enough people are using this command that we arenow supporting it. For compatibility with earlier 9100 Series models "CLEAR FM" does notcause OPERATION COMPLETE status.

5-38

Page 146: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command

Causes generation of the waveform(s) loaded into the high speed memory to begin.

FORMAT:

GO

GO

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

GO; The waveform(s) resident in thehigh speed memory at thatmoment from the previousLOAD and LINK commands willbe generated after arm andtrigger conditions are met. (SeeTrigger modes command)

NOTES:

o In the event that the following commands are requested during the execution of a waveform(i.e., while GO is executing) an ABORT and GO sequence is executed automatically by thegenerator, thus re-establishing the new conditions.

CHI/CH2 INVERTTRIGGER_MODE (in DELAY_MODE of POINTS or TIME)TRIGGER DELAYm

Additionally, a change in amplitude will result in a momentary disconnect~reconnect ofoutput. A change in CLOCK RATE will also result in a momentary stop and restart of thetime base.

2. A LOAD command terminates a GO, (i.e., ABORTS the waveform running).

3. No Query form of this command.

5-39

Page 147: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Action Command NEXT

This command is sent over the bus when it is desired to cause a Sequence file, which is holdingat a WAIT, to resume execution. An <ESC>N will accomplish the same result.

FORMAT: NEXT

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

NEXT or <ESC>N; Causes the resumption of theSequence file which hadpreviously been paused by aninternal WAIT statement.

NOTES:

1. The NEXT command from GPIB does generate ’Op complete’ status. While the 9112 isexecuting a sequence file it will not parse other GPIB commands. The immediate actioncommand <ESC> S may be used instead of "STB?" to read the status bytes while asequence is in progress. (See Table 5.3).

2. No Query form of this command.

5-40

Page 148: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command SELFTEST

(SEL)

SELFTEST causes the following tests to be run:

1) CALIBRATION - Tests internal measurement paths (except for reference voltages), DAC’sand attenuators. See CALIBRATE for more information.

2) HIGH SPEED MEMORY - RAM test of high speed memory capable of detecting all stuckdata bits or address lines, any coupled address lines, and coupling of adjacent data bits.

3) CONTROL MEMORY - RAM test similar to above.

4) NON-VOLATILE MEMORY - Non-destructive RAM test capable of detecting all the errorsof the previous tests except for errors in the higher address lines, since the test is done inblocks (and the data from that block is saved elsewhere). Note that errors addressingnon-volatile (file) memory would be obvious in operation.

5) HIGH SPEED MEMORY TO ANALOG BOARD TRANSFER - Tests the capability totransfer data from the high speed memory to the analog board along the path used duringwaveform generation.

The results of selftest appear only in status byte 8, readable by "STB 8". Please see table 5.1.Selftest takes over one minute to complete.

FORMAT:

SELFTEST

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

SELFTEST; The tests described above arerun. The front panel SELFTESTLED is illuminated while thetests are in progress.

FRONT PANEL INDICATOR:

The SELFTEST LED lights when the SELFTEST command is received. The SELFTESTLED remains on during the duration of the tests.

NOTES: No Query form of this command.

5-41

Page 149: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Action Command

Same as ABORT.

FORMAT:

STOP

STOP

EXAMPLE:

NOTES:

COMMAND

STOP;

No Query form of this command.

COMMENTS

Will cause a presently activewaveform to stop running fromthe 9112 high speed memory.

5-42

Page 150: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command TRIGGER

(TGR)

If TRIGGER SOURCE BUS=ON, this command will fire the trigger from the bus. Using theGPIB Device Trigger (GET) will achieve the same result.

FORMAT:

TRIGGER

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

TRIGGER;TGR;

If the TRIGGER SOURCE BUSis ON, it will init]-ate the triggerand cause the waveform to begingeneration.

5-43

Page 151: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

CHANNEL PARAMETER COMMANDS

Channel Parameter Command CH1 AMPLITUDE

CH2 AMPLITUDEm

(C1A) (C2A)

Sets the peak-to-peak amplitude of the waveform being output on Channel 1 or Channel 2. Theamplitude must be from 0 to 10 V. If it is desired to increase or decrease the amplitude from itscurrent setting, the RELATIVE argument may be used. In this case the sign on the numberdesignates the direction to increment: (+) for up and (-) for down.

FORMAT:

CHI_AMPLITUDE argl, arg2C1A argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl:

arg2:

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 1 V p-p

EXAMPLES:

A number from 0 to 10 V, with units designator }xV, mV or V.When used with RELATIVE (REL) command as arg2 this is signed number, otherwise this is an unsigned number.

The word RELATIVE (REL), (optional)

COMMAND COMMENTS

CH1 AMPLITUDE +.IV, REL;C1A=+. 1V, REL;C 1A=. 1, RELATIVE;

These commands incrementcurrent amplitude by + . 1 V

IMPORTANT: This and the following set of channel parameter commands for the 9112 areapplicable to both Channel 1 and Channel 2. For instance, to change the amplitude of Channel1 use CIA or CH1 AMPLITUDE. Similarly, to change the amplitude of Channel 2 use thecommand C2A or CH2 AMPLITUDE. Only the channel number is changed.

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCII strings, not as a #0 block.

5-44

Page 152: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Channel Parameter Command CH1 DIGITAL WORD

CH2_DIGITAL_WORD

(CID) (C2D)

Toggles the state of the CH1 or CH2 Digital Word Output enable. When disabled, all clock anddata lines of a channel’s digital output will be in the low state. When enabled, the digitaloutput’s upper 12 bits contain the code delivered to that channel’s signal DAC for the timeperiod under consideration. The lower 4 bits can be programmed at the user’s discretion.

FORMAT:

C1D argCH I_DIGITAL_WORD arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The words ON, OFF, ALT

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: OFF

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

CH I_DIGITAL_WORD ON;

CH2D=OFF

Enables the Digital WordOutput for Channel 1.

Disables the Digital WordOutput for Channel 2.

NOTES:

I. This feature may not be implemented in pre-release versions of 9112 firmware (prior to 1.0).In such versions, the digital outputs are always enabled.

2. Query responses are always sent as plain strings.

5-45

Page 153: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Channel Parameter Command

This command inverts the waveform in Channel 1 or Channel 2 and resets theZERO_REFERENCE to the complement value about a center value of 127.5.

COMMANDS

FORMAT: CH1 INVERTCII

VALID ARGUMENTS:

ON turns invert on if it is not currently on on

OFF turns invert off if it is not currently off

DEFAULTS:

Power up: OFF

CHI_INVERT

CH2_INVERT(Cll) (C2I)

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

C II,ON; This command inverts thewaveform on channel 1

FRONT PANEL CONTROL/INDICATORS: LEDs indicate invert state for each channel.

NOTES:

1. The generator automatically handles changes of ZERO_REFERENCE, SINGLE TO DUALWAVEFORM and DUAL TO SINGLE, if CHI, CH2 or both channels have INVERT on.

2. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-46

Page 154: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Channel Parameter Command CHI_LOAD_COMP

CH2 LOAD COMPm

(C1L) (C2L)

This command is used to control the 9112’s load compensation feature. The default state is off.When LOAD COMP is enabled, the generator will measure the loads connected to thatchannel’s anaTog output. From that point on, all internal calculations concerning amplitude andoffset are based on the assumption that the same load is still applied. To facilitate changes ofthe load impedance, the measurement will be repeated if the feature is turned on when it isalready on. If load compensation is disabled, a 50 f~ load is assumed.

NOTE: The load measurement is accomplished by determining what DAC code is necessary todrive the load to 1 V. If the device to be driven could be damaged by the application of a 1 Vinput, the 9112 should be powered up with no load connected (i.e., driving an open circuit),and the compensation calculations must be performed by the user, based on the 9112’s 50 £1source impedance.

CH I_LOAD_COMParg

C1L arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The words ON and OFF.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: OFF

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

CH1 LOAD COMP ON;C1L-ON; -

CH1 LOAD COMP OFF;C1L OFF;

COMMENTS

These commands will turn onthe load compensation featureon Channel 1 if it is off, orrepeat the load measurementif it is already on.

These commands will turn offthe load compensation featurein Channel 1.

QUERY RESPONSES: The response to the query form of this command (C1L?;) will returneither "ON" or "OFF".

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-47

Page 155: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Channel Parameter Command CHI_OFFSET

CH2..OFFSET

(ClO) (c2o)Sets the Channel 1 or Channel 2 DC offset levels. If it is desired to increase or decrease fromthe present value, the REL argument may be used.

FORMAT:

CHI_OFFSET argl, arg2C10 argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl:

arg2:

DEFAULTS:

a signed number from 0 and 5 V with an unit designator (gV, mV or V).

In RELATIVE (REL) mode, a signed number from 0 to 10

The word RELATIVE (REL) (Optional).

Power-up: 0 V

EXAMPLES:

NOTES:

COMMANDS

CH1 OFFSET +l.05V;w

CHI_OFFSET=+I.05 V;C10=1.05;

COMMENT

The CH1 offset will be set to+1.05 V by these commands.

Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-48

Page 156: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Channel Parameter Command CH1 OUTPUT

CH2 OUTPUTn

(CIP) (C2P)

Controls the requested state of the CH1 or CH2 output relays and acts as an enable to theoutput control. The output will be connected when the output enable is on and the mode of theAFG allows the channel to be on.

Channel 1 output will be on whenever a waveform is active and CH1 OUTPUT = ON.2 output will be on whenever a dual waveform is active and CH2_OU-TPUT = ON.

Channel

FORMAT:

C1P argCH I_OUTPUT arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The words ON, OFF, ALT

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: ON

EXAMPLE:

NOTES:

COMMAND

CH1 OUTPUT ON;

C 1P=OFF;

Query responses are always sent as plain strings.

COMMENTS

The output enable for CH1 isturned on. If waveform is active,the output relay for CH 1 will beturned on.The enable for CH1 is turnedoff. If the output relay for CH1was on, it will be turned off.

5-49

Page 157: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Channel Parameter Command CHI_ZERO_REFCH2 ZERO REFm

(CIZ) (C2Z)

This command specifies the point on the vertical axis of the CH 1 or CH2 waveforms thatrepresents the DC Offset level of the output. If the DC Offset is zero, then this commandspecifies the zero volt reference point for the waveform. Since there are 4096 levels in theamplitude of the waveform (12 bits), the C1Z or C2Z can be set anywhere from 0 to 4095. If is desired to increase or decrease present value, then REL may be used as an argument.

FORMAT:

CHI_ZERO REF argl, arg2C1Z, argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

arg 1: an interger number from 0 to 4095. When used with RELATIVE command thisis a signed number, otherwise this is an unsigned number.

arg2: the word RELATIVE (REL).

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 2047.5

EXAMPLE: COMMANDS

CH2 ZERO REF=0C1Z-0; -

COMMENTS

These commands set zeroreference to 0, bottomof waveform then corresponds toDC offset level.

C2Z=4095; Set zero reference to 4095, topof waveform then corresponds toDC offset level.

NOTES:

I. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

2. Query responses will be of the form CHI ZERO_REFERENCE, which will also parsecorrectly as a command, if COMM HDR=LONG.

5-50

Page 158: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

TIME BASE COMMANDS

Time Base Command

Selects the source of the generator clock: either internal or external.

FORMAT:

CSOU argCLOCK_SOURCE arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The words INTERNAL (INT), EXTERNAL (EXT)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: INTERNAL

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENT

CSOU=INTERNAL;

CLOCK_SOURCE

(csou)

CLOCK SOURCE EXTERNAL;CSOU=I~XT;

The generator will use theinternal clock source.

The generator derives clockfrom the rear panel BNC.

REAR PANEL CONTROL: External Input must be provided.

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-51

Page 159: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Time Base Command CLOCK LEVEL

(CLEV)

Sets the threshold detection level for the EXTERNAL CLOCK input. The range is -4-2.5 V, with8 bits resolution. If it is desired to increase or decrease the level from its present value, the RELargument may be used.

FORMAT:

CLOCK_LEVEL argl, arg2CLEV argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: A signed number from 0 to 2.5 V, with an optional units designator. In

RELATIVE (REL) mode a signed number from 0 to 5 V with 3 digitsresolution.

arg2: The word RELATIVE (REL) (optional)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: +2VUnspecified Command: sign: +

units: VNot RELATIVE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

CLOCK LEVEL +200mV;m

CLEV=-2V;

This sets the EXTERNALCLOCK threshold to +200 mV.

This sets the EXTERNALCLOCK threshold to -2 V.

REAR PANEL CONTROL: Applies only to external input.

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain strings.

5-52

Page 160: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

i

Time Base Command CLOCKMODE

(CMOD)

CLOCK_MODE,SLAVE is used to synchronize one 9112 AFG to another, the unit placed inSLAVE mode uses the signal on the CLOCK IN (EXT) rear panel BNC connector as its clock.This signal is assumed to come from the CLOCK OUT 2 rear panel BNC connector of another9112 which is in CLOCK MODE MASTER.

NOTE: CLOCK OUT 1 provides continuous output at the clock frequency. Only CLOCK OUT 2is suitable for MASTER/SLAVE operation.

Upon entering slave mode, CLOCK SOURCE defaults to EXTERNAL, CLOCK SLOPE defaultsto positive, and CLOCK LEVEL defaults to -200 mV. The previous settings are restored uponreceipt of a CLOCK MODE, MASTER command. While in slave mode, the CLOCK SOURCEand CLOCK SLOPE cannot be changed. CLOCK LEVEL can be changed. Also, while a unit isin slave mode, TRIGGER MODE settings have no effect. The trigger delay is controlled by theabsence of clock pulses from the master 9112. Trigger settings entered while in SLAVE modewill correctly take effect when the clock mode is changed to MASTER. Other commands thathave no effect in SLAVE mode are: CRAT, CPER, MDEL, DMOD. Please see "Synchronizingwith another 9112 AFG" in Chapter 3 for more information.

FORMAT:

CLOCK_MODE argl

VALID ARGUMENTS:

MASTERSLAVE

DEFAULT:

MASTER

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

CLOCKMODE,SLAVE;CMOD,SLAVE;CLOCK_MODE, MASTER;CMOD,MASTER;

COMMENTS

QUERY RESPONSE:

CHDR off: MASTER; or SLAVE;CHDR short: CMOD=MASTER; or CMOD=SLAVE;CHDR long: CLOCK_MODE=MASTER; or CLOCKMODE=SLAVE

REAR PANEL CONTROL:

The MASTER’S CLOCK OUT 2 must be connected to the slave’s CLOCK IN (EXT).

5-53

Page 161: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Time Base Command CLOCK RATE

(CRAT)

Sets the internal clock repetition rate in a frequency range from .01 Hz to 50 MHz. The newsetting can be made relative to the current setting by using the RELATIVE (REL) argument. that case, the number can be preceded by a sign to indicate whether the increment is up (+) down (-).

FORMAT:

CLOCK_RATE argl, arg2CRAT argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: a number from .01 Hz to 50 MHz with 4 digits of resolution, with optional units

designator (Hz, kHz, or MHz).arg2: the word RELATIVE (REL) (optional)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up = J0 MHzUnspecified command: Units: Hz, not RELATIVE

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

CLOCK RATE=25.1MHz;CRAT=2"5.1MHz;

Sets clock to 25.1 MHz

NOTES:

1. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

2. CLOCK_PERIOD may be entered if preferred.

3. CLOCK_RA TE not applicable if CLOCK_SOURCE is external.

5-54

Page 162: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Time Base Command CLOCK_SLOPE

(CSLO)

Selects which edge of the external clock will be used as the reference for all external timing.Only applicable if CLOCK_SOURCE is set to external.

FORMAT:

CLOCK_SLOPE arglCSLO argl

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The words POSITIVE (POS) or the word NEGATIVE (NEG) or ALTERNATE (ALT).

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: POSITIVE (POS)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

CLOCK SLOPE=NEGATIVE;CSLO=I~EG;

Causes transitions on the analogoutputs to occur in response tonegative going edges of theexternal clock signal.

REAR PANEL CONTROL: Only applicable to external input.

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-55

Page 163: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Time Base Command CLOCK PERIODm

(CPER)

Sets the internal clock period in a range from 20 nsec to 40 sec The new setting can be maderelative to the current setting by using the RELATIVE argument. In that case, a sign mustprecede the number to indicate whether the increment is up (+) or down (-).

FORMAT:

CLOCK PERIOD argl, arg2CPER argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: a number from 20 nsec to 40 sec with optional units (sec, msec, ~tsec, nsec).

arg2:

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 20 nsecUnspecified Command: Units: sec, Not RELATIVE

EXAMPLES: COMMAND

CLOCK_PERIOD=+5 ttsec,REL;

CPER=9.012msec;

InRELATIVE (REL) mode, can be a signed number from 5 nsec to 40 sec with digits of resolution.The word RELATIVE (REL) (optional)

NOTES:

1. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCII strings.

2. CLOCK_RATE may be entered, if preferred.

3.

COMMENTS

Increments the INTERNALCLOCK period by 5 ~sec.Sets the INTERNAL CLOCKperiod to 9.012 msec.

CLOCK_PERIOD not applicable if CLOCKSOURCE is external.

5-56

Page 164: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Timebase Commands CLOCKREFERENCE

(CREF)

This command selects internal or external 4 MHz phase lock loop reference for the 9112’sinternal clock generation circuitry. This permits multiple 9112s to run at different clockfrequencies and still be phase locked.

NOTE: Do not set CREF EXT unless a 4 MHz signal is present at the reference input, orimproper operation will result.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

CLOCK_REFERENCE argCREF argCLOCK REFERENCE?mCREF?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

INTINTERNALEXTEXTERNAL

DEFAULT:

INTERNAL

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

CREF INT;

COMMENTS

Select internal clock reference.

REAR PANEL CONTROL: External reference must be supplied, if selected.

NOTES:

1. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

2. WARNING - Setting CLOCK_REFERENCE, EXTERNAL and failure to supply EXTERNALREFERENCE will result in erroneous values for CLOCK_RATE and CLOCK_PERIOD.

5-57

Page 165: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

TRIGGER COMMANDS

Trigger Commands DELAY MODEE

(DMOD)

This commands sets whether TRIGGER DELAY and MARKER DELAY will be set in eitherPOINTS or TIME. In Standard Function mode, the delays should be set in time only, since theclock is not under explicit user control. See STANDARD for more information.

If DMOD=TIME and the clock rate is changed, the 9112 attempts to maintain the specifieddelay in time. (This is likely to produce ’value adapted’ status.)

Note that when CLOCK_SOURCE is EXTERNAL, the 9112 does not know the clock’s periodand is unable to calculate how many points is equivalent to how much time. Therefore,DELAY_MODE, POINTS should be used when CLOCK_SOURCE is EXTERNAL.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting (see below).

FORMAT:

DELAY MODE argDMOD argDELAY MODE?DMODT-

VALID ARGUMENTS:

POINTSPTSTIMETIM

DEFAULT:

points (in Arbitrary Function mode).

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

DMOD TIME; Make TDEL and MDEL settablein time.

5-58

Page 166: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Trigger Command MARKER_DELAY

(MDEL)

Controls the Marker synchronizing output pulse. This pulse is available at the Marker OutputBNC. Its timing is relative to the trigger input, and it is only available in the RECURRENT,SINGLE or BURST Trigger Modes. The MARKER DELAY command sets the delay in clockcycles (points) or time from the trigger point to the output pulse. See DELAY_MODE formore information. If the RELATIVE (REL) argument is used the delay will increase by thevalue in argl.

Note that if the Marker delay is programmed for a number of greater than the sum of thetrigger delay and the total number of points that will be output (including segment repetitions,links, and waveform repetitions), no Marker pulse will be generated. Also, at clock rates greaterthan 10 MHz, the width of the Marker pulse (nominally 75 nsec) may be reduced if it positioned within 75 nsec of the last point generated.

FORMAT:

MARKER DELAY argl, arg2MDEL arg’l, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: Any integer number from 1 to 5+E5. In RELATIVE mode argl is a signed

number in the range (+/-) 5+E5.arg2: The word RELATIVE (REL). (Optional)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 2 Unspecified Command: Not Relative

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

MARKER DELAY 4000;MDEL=40-00;

COMMENTS

The marker pulse will bedelayed 4000 clock cyclesfrom the trigger point.

FRONT PANEL CONTROL/INDICATORS: Available at front panel connector

NOTES:.

I. In the RECURRENT trigger mode the minimum delay is 4 clock cycles.

2. The valid arguments listed above assume that DELAY MODE is POINTS. ForDELAY_MODE, TIME, the range of valid arguments 7s dependent upon the CLOCK_RATE,and extends from 20 nsec to 50,000,000 sec.

3. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCII strings.

5-59

Page 167: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Trigger Command TRIG_ARM_SOURCE

(WAS)

Selects the source for arming the trigger. There are two options: the bus or automatic re-arming.The bus argument is useful if it is desirable to have the trigger disabled until just before theevent. The auto argument is useful when a repetitive signal is present on the Ext. Trigger inputand it is desired that the waveform be re-triggered as fast as possible.

FORMAT:

TRIG ARM SOURCE argTAS arg -

VALID ARGUMENTS:BUS: receives its arming command from the GPIB, RS-232, or the Optional Control

Panel.AUTO: automatically re-arms itself as soon as the waveform has completed one cycle.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: AUTO

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TRIG_ARM_SOURCE=BUS;TAS=BUS;

TAS=AUTO;

TAS?

COMMENTS

Receives its arming signalfrom a bus or the optionalcontrol panel.

Re-arms after each waveformcycle.Query

5-60

Page 168: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Trigger Command TRIG_DELAY

(TDEL)

Causes a specified delay, in points or time, from the time of receipt of a trigger to the start of awaveform. Can be any value from two to one half million points or the equivalent in time. If itis desired to increase the value from the present value the RELATIVE argument can be used. Ifthe REL argument is used the TRIG_DELAY will be increased or decreased (+/-) by thespecified value in points. See DELAYMODE for more information.

FORMAT:

TRIG_DELAY argl, arg2

TDEL argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: An integer value between 1 and 5E+5. In RELATIVE (REL) mode it can be

number (+/-) 5E+5.arg2: The word RELATIVE (RE.L). (optional).

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 2Unspecified Command: not relative

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TDEL=+10,REL;TRIG_DELAY = 10,REL;

COMMENTS

Increases the trigger delay inpoints by a count of ten.

NOTES:

1. In RECURRENT TRIG_MODE the minimum delay is 4 clock cycles.

2. The valid arguments listed above assume that DELAY_MODE is POINTS. ForDELAY_MODE, TIME, the range of valid arguments is dependent upon the CLOCK_RATE,and extends from 20 nsec to 50,000,000 sec.

3. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

t5-61

Page 169: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Trigger Command TRIG LEVELE

(TLEV)

Sets the threshold voltage level for an external trigger signal where the trigger will cause thewaveform to start. It is settable in the range from -4-2.5 V with three digits of resolution. If theoptional RELATIVE (REL) argument is used, the value expressed in argl becomes the value forincreasing the present level.

FORMAT:

TRIG_LEVEL argl, arg2

TLEV argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: Any signed number in the range (+/-) 2.5 V with up to three digits of resolution

arg2:

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: +2VUnspecified Command: Sign: plus(+) Units: Volts (V)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

and an optional units designator (mV or V). In RELATIVE (REL) Mode, be a signed number (+/-) 5 The word RELATIVE (REL). (optional).

COMMENTS

TRIG LEVEL +l.05V;TLE~v~ 1.05 mV;

Sets the trigger level to +1.05V.

FRONT PANEL CONTROL/INDICATORS: Command only applicable to front panelexternal TRIGGER/GATE input

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-62

Page 170: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Trigger Command TRIG_MODE

(TMOD)

This command determines how the waveform is generated. It can be generated in one of fiveways: CONTINUOUS - where the waveform starts again with the very next clock cycle after itslast programmed point; RECURRENT - after completing its last programmed point, thewaveform starts again, but with a programmable delay (TRIG DELAY command), in clockcycles; SINGLE - where the waveform runs only once after receiving an external or manualtrigger; BURST - where the waveform runs a programmed number of repetitions upon receipt ofan internal or external trigger, then stops; GATE - where the waveform runs continuously aftera gate signal is detected above threshold at the Trigger/Gate input. The gated signal stops afterthe gate signal drops below threshold. (See also TRIG_ARM_SOURCE and TRIG_SOURCEcommands.)

FORMAT:

TRIG_MODE argl, arg2

TMOD argl arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: 1. CONTINUOUS (CON)

2. RECURRENT (REC)3. SINGLE (SING)4. BURST (BUR)5. GATE

arg2: Any integer number from 0 to 65,535. It specifies the number of waveformcycles to be repeated. NOTE: arg2 is valid only when used with either theRECURRENT or BURST arguments.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: CONTINUOUSUnspecified Command: Current Setting

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

NOTES:

TRIG MODE BURST, 100; The waveform will not start untilit receives a manual or externaltrigger signal. Then it will repeat100 times and stop.

TMOD = SING; After receiving an external ormanual trigger signal, thewaveform runs one time only.

Query responses are always sent as plain ASCII strings.

5-63

Page 171: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

i I i

Trigger Command TRIG_SLOPE(TSLO)

Selects which slope of an external trigger signal will be used to start the waveform. Thiscommand is only used when the TRIG_MODE is SINGLE, BURST or GATED.

FORMAT:

TRIG SLOPE argTSLO-arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

The word POSITIVE (POS), or the word NEGATIVE (NEG)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: POSITIVE (POS)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TRIG SLOPE NEGATIVE;TSLO-= NEG;

COMMENTS

Causes the waveform to start onthe negative edge of an externaltrigger signal.

FRONT PANEL CONTROL/INDICATORS: Command only applicable to front panelTRIGGER/GATE input.

NOTES: Query responses are always sent as plain ASCH strings.

5-64

Page 172: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Trigger Command TRIG_SOURCE

(TSOU)

This command selects the source for the trigger signal. The options are: MANUAL (front-panelbutton or control panel key), EXTERNAL (an analog signal from the External Trigger inputBNC), or BUS (from either the GPIB or the RS-232 bus). Any one, all, or any combination ofthese may be active at the same time, they are logically OR’d together.

FORMAT:

TSOU argl, arg2TRIG_SOURCE argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:argl: 1. MANUAL (MAN)

2. EXTERNAL (EXT)3. BUS

arg2: ON or OFF

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: MAN and BUS ON and EXT OFFUnspecified Command: current settings

QUERY RESPONSE:

All three sources and their state (ON or OFF)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TRIG SOURCE MANUAL, ON;

TSOU MAN, OFF;

COMMENTS

This turns on the MANUALtrigger source.

Turns off the MANUAL triggersource.

QUERY RESPONSES:

COMM_HEADER -- OFF:= SHORT:= LONG

Queries are individually requested by source(i.e., TSOU MAN?)

ON/OFF;TSOU (MAN/EXT/BUS) OFF/ON;TRIG SOURCE (MANUAL/EXTERNAL/BUS)(OFFTON);

NOTES:

1. If all trigger sources are "ON" a trigger will occur on a first-come, first-serve basis iftrigger arm source is bus and the generator is armed in a triggerable mode (i.e., single orburst). In TRIG ARM_SOURCE = AUTO, under these circumstances trigger is strictlyfirst-come, first-served.

5-65

Page 173: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

2. Query responses are always sent as plain ASCII strings.

3. If no trigger source is enabled in a triggered mode, issuing the ’GO’ command produceserror status.

5-66

Page 174: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

STANDARD FUNCTION COMMANDS

Standard Function STANDARD

(STAN)

Selects standard function generation mode. If an arbitrary waveform was being generated it isaborted. In this mode you cannot LOAD and LINK files, you simply specify the desiredfunction. The CK) command is not necessary to commence output after the function has beenselected.

In standard mode the 9112’s clock is automatically set to achieve the characteristics of thefunction which you requested. Since you do not have explicit control over the 9112’s clock, i.e.,the time per point, you should set DELAY_MODE to TIME.

FORMAT:

STANDARDSTAN

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

STAN; Select standard function mode

NOTE: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function.

NOTES:

1. It is not necessary to send this command. For example, sending SINE; is sufficient to enterstandard function SINE and generate a sine waveform.

2. If FUNC was ARBITRARY, after issuing the STANDARD command, the query "FUNC?;"will return FUNC = STANDARD. In this state the 9112 waits for you to select a function(e.g., SINE). If a standard function was already running, STANDARD has no effect.

5-67

Page 175: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function SINE

(SINE)

This command forces Standard Function mode. It selects sine wave as the current standardfunction. If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a sine wave to be generated using the current settings.

FORMAT:

SINE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SINE; Select SINE as the currentstandard function.

QUERY RESPONSES: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function.

NOTES: If the 9112 is already generating a STANDARD function SINE, this command has noeffect and output continues.

5-68

Page 176: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function SINE_MODE

(SMOD)

Select single or dual channel sine wave generation.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SINE MODE argSMOD argSINE MODE?SMOD?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

SINGLESINGDUAL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: SINGLE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SMOD SING; Select single channel output forstandard function sine wave.

SMOD?; Would return either SINGLE (orSING) or DUAL, reflecting thecurrent setting.

NOTES: If the 9112 is already generating a standard SINE wave, output continues in the newmode.

5-69

Page 177: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function SINEFREQUENCY(SIFR)

Sets the frequency of the sine wave generated by the SINE standard function.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SINE_FREQUENCY argl,arg2SIFR argl,arg2SINE_FREQUENCY?SIFR?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the frequency in Hz, from 0.010 to 6.25E+6, or INC orDEC.

arg2: Optional. Relative. If this argument is omitted, argl becomes the sine wavefrequency.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 100 kHz

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SIFR 5MHZ; Sets sine frequency to 5MHz.If a standard function sine waveis being output, this takes effectimmediately.

SIFR?; Returns the current setting.

NOTES: If the 9112 is already generating a standard SINE wave, output continues at the newfrequency.

5-70

Page 178: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function SINE_CH 1_PHASE

(SCIP)

Sets standard function sinewave Channel 1 starting phase in degrees.

NOTE: If SINE MODE is dual, this will effect the starting phase of Channel 2 also; see SC2Pfor more inform~ion.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SINE CH1 PHASE argl,arg2SC lP-arg 1,arg2SINE CH1 PHASE?scip -

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 0 to 360, or INC or DEC

arg2: Optional. RELATIVE (REL)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SCIP 45; The first point in the generatedsine wave will be at 45 degrees.If a standard function sine waveis being output, this takes effectimmediately.

SC1P IO,REL; SC1P is increased by 10 degrees.

SCIP?; The current setting is returned.

NOTES: If the 9112 is already generating a standard sine wave, output continues at the newphase.

5-71

Page 179: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function SINE CH2 PHASEm

(SC2P)

Sets standard function sine wave Channel 2 phase in degrees relative to Channel 1 phase.

NOTE: Channel 2 leads Channel 1 by the number of degrees specified.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SINE CH2 PHASE argl,arg2SC2P"argl ,arg2SINE CH2 PHASE?SC2P~ -

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 0 to 360

arg2: Optional. RELATIVE (REL)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SC2P 45;

SC2P 10,REL;

SC2P?;

The first point in channel 2’sgenerated sine wave will be 45degrees ahead of channel l’ssine wave. If a standard functionsine wave is being output, thistakes effect immediately.

SC2P is increased by 10 degrees.

The current setting is returned.

NOTES: If the 9112 is already generating a standard sine wave, this command causes the newwave to be calculated and output continues.

5-72

Page 180: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function SQUARE

(SQU)

This command forces Standard Function Mode. It selects square wave as the current standardfunction. If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a square wave to be generated at the current settings.

FORMAT:

SQUARE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

SQUARE;

COMMENTS

Select SQUARE as the currentstandard function.

QUERY RESPONSES: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function.

5-73

Page 181: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function

Select single or dual channel square wave generation.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

SQUARE_MODE

(SQMD)

FORMAT:

SQUARE_MODE argSQUARE_MODE?SQMD?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

SINGLESINGDUAL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: SINGLE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SQMD SING; Select single channel output forstandard function square wave.

SQMD?; Would return either SINGLE (orSING) or DUAL, reflecting thecurrent setting.

5-74

Page 182: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function SQUARE_FREQUENCY(SQFR)

Sets the frequency of the square wave generated by the SQUARE standard function.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SQUARE_FREQUENCY argl,arg2SQFR argl,arg2SQUARE_FREQUENCY?SQFR?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the frequency in Hz, from 0.010 to 25.0E+6.

arg2: Optional. REL. If this argument is omitted, argl becomes the squarewavefrequency.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 100 kHz

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SQFR 10MHZ; Sets squarewave frequency to10 MHz. If a standard functionsquare wave is being output, thistakes effect immediately.

SQFR 100,REL; SQFR is increased by 100 Hz.

SQFR?; Returns the current setting.

5-75

Page 183: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function SQUARE_PHASE

(SQUP)

Sets standard function square wave Channel 1 starting phase in time. Note that ifSQUARE_MODE is dual, this will effect the starting phase of Channel 2 also; see SQRP formore information.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SQUARE_PHASE argl,arg2SQUP argl,arg2SQUARE_PHASE?SQUP?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A time which is a fraction of the selected period. Times in excess of period willbe ignored.

arg2: Optional. REL.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

SQUP 1 us;

SQUP 10 ~tsec,REL;

SQUP?;

The first point in the generatedsquare wave will be at 1 ttsecafter the transition to the lowestvalue. If a standard functionsquare wave is being output,this takes effect immediately.

SQUP is increased by 10 ttsec.

The current setting is returned.

5-76

Page 184: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function SQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASE

(SQRP)

Sets standard function square wave Channel 2 phase in time relative to Channel 1 phase.

NOTE: Channel 2 leads Channel 1 by the time specified.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

SQUARE_RELATIVEPHASE argl,arg2SQRP argl,arg2SQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASE?SQRP?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A time which is a fraction of the selected period, i.e., 0 to period.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

SQRP 1us;

SQRP 10 i.tsec,REL;

SQRP?;

COMMENTS

Transitions on Channel 2’ssquare wave will be generated1 p.sec ahead of channel l’ssquare wave. If a standardfunction square wave isbeing output, this takes effectimmediately.

SQRP is increased by 10 p-sec.

The current setting is returned.

NOTES: If COMM HDR=LONG query responses will be of the form SQ_REL_PHASE, whichwill also parse correctly as a command.

5-77

Page 185: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function TRIANGLE

(TRI)

This command forces Standard Function mode. It selects triangle wave as the current standardfunction. If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a triangle wave to be generated using the current settings.

FORMAT:

TRIANGLETRI

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

TRI; Select TRIANGLE as the currentstandard function.

QUERY RESPONSES: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function

5-78

Page 186: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function

Select single or dual channel triangle wave generation.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

TRIANGLE_MODE argTRIM argTRIANGLE MODE?TRIM?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

SINGLESINGDUAL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: SINGLE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TRIM SING;

TRIM?

TRIANGLE MODE

(TRIM)

COMMENTS

Select single channel output forstandard function triangle wave.

Would return either SINGLE (orSING) or DUAL, reflecting thecurrent setting.

5-79

Page 187: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function TRIANGLE_FREQUENCY(TRFR)

Sets the frequency of the triangle wave generated by the TRIANGLE standard function.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

TRIANGLE FREQUENCY argl,arg2TRFR argl,arg2TRIANGLE_FREQUENCY?TRFR?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the frequency in Hz, from 0.010 to 6.25E+6.

arg2: Optional. REL. If this argument is omitted, argl becomes the triangle frequency.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 100 kHz

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

TRFR 5MHZ; Sets triangle frequency to5 MHz. If a standard functiontriangle wave is being output, thistakes effect immediately.

TRFR 100,REL; TRFR is increased by 100 Hz.

TRFR? Returns the current setting.

5-80

Page 188: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function TRIANGLE PHASEm

(TRIP)

This command sets the starting point of the Channel 1 triangle wave. UnlikeSINE_CHI_PHASE but like RAMP_PHASE and SQUARE_PHASE, this command’s firstargument is not in degrees but is in time, from 0 to period.

NOTE: If TMOD is DUAL, this will affect the starting phase of Channel 2 also; see TRRP formore information.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

TRIANGLE PHASE argl,arg2TRIP argl,a~g2TRIANGLE_PHASE?TRIP?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the time offset into the wave, from 0 to the period, orINC or DEC.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

TRIP 1 us;

TRIP 10E-6,REL;

TRIP?

COMMENTS

Sets triangle "phase" to 1 p~sec,which means the wave begins atthe point which is 1 ~sec afterthe lowest value. If a standardfunction triangle wave is beingoutput, this takes effectimmediately.

TRIP is increased by 10 ~tsec.

Returns the current setting.

5-81

Page 189: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function TRIANGLE_RELATIVE_PHASE

(TRRP)

Sets standard function triangle wave Channel 2 starting phase in time, relative to Channel 1.

NOTE: Channel 2 leads Channel I by the time specified.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

TRIANGLE RELATIVE_PHASE argl,arg2TRRP argl,~g2TRIANGLE_RELATIVE_PHASE?TRRP?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 0 to period, or INC or DEC.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

TRRP 1us; All points in Channel 2’striangle wave will precede thethe corresponding points inChannel 1 by 1 ttsec. If astandard functiontriangle wave is being output,this takes effect immediately.

TRRP 10ttsec,REL; TRRP is increased by 10 ~tsec.

TRRP? The current setting is returned.

NOTES: If COMM HDR=LONG query responses will be of the form TRIREL_PHASE, whichwill also parse correctly as a command.

5-82

Page 190: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function RAMP

(RAMP)

This command forces Standard Function mode. It selects RAMP as the current standardfunction. If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a ramp to be generated using the current settings.

FORMAT:

RAMP

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

RAMP; Select RAMP as the currentstandard function.

QUERY RESPONSES: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function.

5-83

Page 191: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function

Select single or dual channel ramp wave generation.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

RAMP_MODE argRMOD argRAMP MODE?RMOD~

VALID ARGUMENTS:

SINGLESINGDUAL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: SINGLE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

RMOD SING;

RMOD?

RAMP MODE

(RMOD)

COMMENTS

Select single channel output forstandard function ramp wave.

Would return either SINGLE (orSING) or DUAL, reflecting thecurrent setting.

5-84

Page 192: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function RAMP PERIOD

(RPER)

Sets the period of the ramp generated by the RAMP standard function.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

RAMP PERIOD argl,arg2RPER argl,arg2RAMP PERIOD?RPER?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the time duration of the ramp in seconds, from 160 nsecto 100.0 sec.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 10 ~tsec

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

RPER 1us; Sets ramp period to 1 btsec. Ifa standard function ramp isbeing output, this takes effectimmediately.

RPER 1E-6,REL; RPER is increased by 1 ~sec.

RPER?; Returns the current setting.

5-85

Page 193: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function RAMP PHASEm

(RMPP)

This command sets the starting point of the standard function ramp. UnlikeSINE CHI_PHASE but like TRIANGLE_PHASE and SQUARE_PHASE this command’s firstargument is not in degrees but is in time, from 0 to period.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

RAMP PHASE argl,arg2RMPPargl,arg2RAMP PHASE?RMPP~-

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number representing the time offset into the wave, from O to the period, orINC or DEC.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

RMPP 40ns;

RMPP 10E-6,REL;

RMPP?

COMMENTS

Sets ramp "phase" to 40 nsec,which means the wave begins atthe point which is 40 nsec afterthe lowest value. If a standardfunction ramp is being output,this takes effect immediately.

RMPP is increased by 10 btsec.

Returns the current setting.

5-86

Page 194: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function RAMP RELATIVE PHASEm

(RPRP)

Sets standard function ramp wave Channel 2 phase in time relative to Channel 1 phase.

NOTE: Channel 2 leads Channel 1 by the time specified.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

RAMP RELATIVE PHASE argl,arg2RPRP arg 1,arg2 -RAMP RELATIVE PHASE?RPRP?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 0 to period, or INC or DEC

arg2: Optional. REL.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 0

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

RPRP 1us;

RPRP 10us,REL;

COMMENTS

All points in Channel 2’sramp wave will precede thecorresponding points inChannel 1 by 1 Ixsec. If astandard function ramp waveis being output, this takes effectimmediately.

RPRP is increased by 10 Ixsec.

RPRP? The current setting is returned.

NOTES: If COMM HDR=LONG query responses will be of thewhich will also parse correctly as a command.

form RAMP REL_PHASE,

5-87

Page 195: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function PULSE(PUL)

This command forces Standard Function Mode. It selects PULSE as the current standardfunction. If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a pulse to be generated using the current settings.

NOTE: Pulse functions are not available for CH2 (i.e., DUAL mode).

FORMAT:

PULSE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

PULSE;

COMMENTS

Select PULSE as the currentstandard function.

5-88

Page 196: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function PULSE WIDTH

(PWID)

This command sets the duration of the high part of the standard function pulse waveform.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

PULSE WIDTH argl,arg2PWID ~gl,arg2PULSE WIDTH?D

PWID7

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 20 nsec to almost 10 sec.

arg2: Optional. REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 200 nsec

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

PWID 27.3ns; Sets pulse width to 2"7.3 nsec.

PWID? Returns current setting.

5-89

Page 197: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function

Select the repetition rate of the standard function pulse.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

PULSE_PERIOD argl,arg2PPER argl,arg2PULSE_PERIOD?PPER?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: A number from 160 nsec to 10 sec.

arg2: Optional.REL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 10 p.sec

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

PPER 1.234msec;

PPER?;

PULSE_PERIOD(PPER)

COMMENTS

Sets pulse period to 1.234 msec.

Returns current setting

5-90

Page 198: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function PULSE_DELAY

(PDEL)

This command sets a specified delay in time from receipt of a trigger to the start of the standardfunction Pulse waveform. This command has no meaning in Continuous or Gated TriggerModes. The mimimum setting is dependent on the trigger mode.

This command is exactly analagous to TRIGGER DELAY in time mode. PULSE_DELAY isused in standard function Pulse instead of TRIGGER DELAY.m

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

PULSE DELAY argl,arg2PDEL ~gl,arg2PULSE DELAY?IPDEL?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: Any value from 35.0 nsec to 5.0 msec in single or burst trigger modes.85.0 nsec to 5.0 msec in recurrent trigger mode.

arg2: Optional. REL.

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: 100 nsec

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

PDEL 1 us;

PDEL REL;

COMMENTS

Sets pulse delay to 1 ttsec.If a standard function pulseis being generated, this commandtakes effect immediately.

Invalid. Missing argl.

5-91

Page 199: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function PULSE_OPTIMIZE

(POPT)

This command asks the 9112 to achieve highest accuracy on pulse width, pulse period or triggerdelay.

To consider why this is necessary, consider asking the 9112 to produce a 50 nsec pulse at a107.4 nsec period, and have a trigger delay of 122 nsec. Since the 9112’s minimum clockperiod is 20 nsec, it cannot attain accurate timing of more than one of these settings in thiscase. The PULSE_OPTIMIZE command instructs the 9112 to attempt to get one of theparameters exactly, at the expense of the others.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

PULSE_OPTIMIZE argPOPT argPULSE_OPTIMIZE?POPT?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

WIDTHPERIODDELAY

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: WIDTH

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

POPT WIDTH;

POPT?

COMMENTS

Ask the 9112 to get the pulsewidth as close as possible toPULSE WIDTH setting. If astandard function pulse is beinggenerated, this takes effectimmediately.

Returns current setting.

5-92

Page 200: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function DC

(DC)

This command forces Standard Function Mode. It selects DC as the current standard function.If some other standard function was being generated it is aborted.

Issuing this command will cause a DC level to be generated using the current settings.

FORMAT:

DC

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

DC; Cause DC level to be generatedcorresponding to the OFFSETand AMP setting.

QUERY RESPONSES: Use FUNCTION? to determine the current function.

5-93

Page 201: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Standard Function DC MODE

(DCMD)

Select single or dual channel DC level generation.

This command can be used as a query to find the current setting.

FORMAT:

DC MODE argDC~/[D argDC MODE?DC~4D?

VALID ARGUMENTS:

SINGLESINGDUAL

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: SINGLE

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

DCMD SING; Select single channel output forstandard function DC level.

DCMD?; Would return either SINGLE (orSING) or DUAL, reflecting thecurrent setting.

5-94

Page 202: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Standard Function DC1 VOLTS

DC2 VOLTS

(DC1) (DC2)

Specifies the output voltage for Channel 1 or Channel 2 when operating in Standard FunctionDC. If it is desired to increase or decrease the output voltage from its current setting by a givenamount, the RELATIVE argument may be used. In this case, the sign on the number designatesthe direction to increment: (+) for up and (-) for down.

FORMAT:

DCI_VOLTS argl, arg2DC1 argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: a signed number between -10 and 10, with units designator ~V, mV or V.

arg2: the word RELATIVE (REL), (optional)

DEFAULTS:

Power-up: +1 V

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

DC1 VOLTS 2.5 VDC1 2.5 V

These commands set theChannel 1 output voltageto 2.5 V when in StandardFunction DC.

DC2 VOLTS = -.1 V RELqDC2 -100 mV RELATIVE

These commands decrementthe Channel 2 output voltageby 100 mV in StandardFunction DC, Dual Mode.

DC1 VOLTS?DCI?"

Query form. Returns thecurrent setting of theChannel 1 output voltagefor Standard Function DC.

NOTES: Query responses are sent as plain ASCH strings, not as a #0 block.

5-95

Page 203: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

QUERY TYPE (Informational) COMMANDS

File Handling (also Query Type Command) ACTIVE_FILES

(AFIL)

This command is a query command which causes the names of all the currently active files to bereturned over the GPIB. These would include the active SETUP file, SEQUENCE file, and allthe WAVEFORM (.WAV and .WAD) files currently active in the high speed memory. Thesemessages are sent in an ASCII format string. As in the directory listing, the names of active filesare preceded by ’*’

FORMAT: , ACTIVE FILESmAFIL

EXAMPLES COMMAND COMMENTS

ACTIVE_FILES;AFIL;

Returns to controller the namesof all active files in the LeCroy9112.

NOTE: If there is a series offiles linked, it will return theirnames also.

NOTES: The same formatted string as seen on a 9100/CP is returned. It is variable length withCRLF each 16 bytes. Unused lines are padded with spaces. It is terminated with the semicolonand is suitable for direct viewing.

5-96

Page 204: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

|

Standard Function FUNCTION

(FUNC)

This command is a query which causes the LeCroy 9112 to return a string, either"ARBITRARY" or SINE, TRIANGLE, RAMP, SQUARE, DC_SING, DC_DUAL, PULSE, orSTANDARD. This indicates whether the 9112 is currently in Arbitrary Waveform or StandardFunction Mode. "STANDARD" is only returned after the STANDARD command is received,before a function is selected. See the commands ARBITRARY and STANDARD for moreinformation.

FORMAT:

FUNCTIONFUNCFUNCTION?FUNC?

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

FUNCTION; 9112 returns eitherARBITRARY, STANDARD,or the selected standardfunction, if any.

5-97

Page 205: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

File Handling (also Query Type Command) EXIST

(EXIS)

This command is a query which causes the LeCroy 9112 to return a message indicating thepresence of the named file. The answer will include the file length.

FORMAT:

EXIST argEXIS arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

Any filename ending with the extensions: .WAV, .WAD, .SET, .SEQ

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

EXIST ANYFILE.WAV;

COMMENTS

Returns the directory name andfile length. For instance,example command would returneither FILE IN FILEMEM(length); NOFILE IN MEMORY.

5-98

Page 206: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

File Handling (also Query Type Command) DIRECTORY

(DIR)

This command is a query which causes the LeCroy 9112 to return a directory of all the files(waveform, setup and sequence) stored in the RAM memory. If one of the arguments is used,only that file category will be returned. If no argument is presented, a directory of all files willbe returned.

FORMAT:

DIRECTORY argDIR arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

WAV (single waveforms), WAD (dual waveforms),SET (setup), SEQ (i.e., sequence)CM (control memory), HSM (high speed memory)

DEFAULT:

Unspecified Argument: DIR of all files will be sent by extension, i.e., .WAV, .WAD,.SET and .SEQ.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

DIRECTORY WAD;DIR WAD;

COMMENTS

This query returns a directoryof the dual waveform filescontained in the RAMMemory space.

DIRECTORY CM;DIR CM;

This query returns a directoryof control memory, showing theorder of segment output andnumber of repetitions for eachwaveform file loaded and linkedin high speed memory.

QUERY RESPONSES:

DIRECTORY HSM; This query returns a directoryDIR HSM; of waveform files currently

resident in high speed memory.

The same formatted string as seen on a 9100/CP is returned. It is ofvariable length depending on number of files. For details of formatseeACTIVE FILES. A stringNO.WAI3 FILES; <CRLF>NO.WAV FILES; <CRLF>NO.SET FILES; <CRLF>

5-99

Page 207: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

NO.SEQ FILES; <CRLF> or <END> is returned if no argument issupplied and no files are present. The individual strings are returnedfor the applicable arguments if no file of a particular type is present.

5-100

Page 208: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command (also a Query Type Command) IDENTIFY

(IV)

This query causes the generator to return its bus address, model number and version number offirmware. This information is returned as four 16-character lines (the first of which is all blank),each followed by <CRLF> for a total of 72 characters.

FORMAT:

IDENTIFY

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

IDENTIFY;ID;

COMMENTS

Returns the information givenabove.

QUERY RESPONSES: The same ASCII string is returned regardless ofCOMM_HEADER setting.

5-101

Page 209: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

0peratin8 Over the GPIB

File Handling (also Query Type Command) MEMORY

(MEM)

This command is a query which causes the LeCroy 9112 to return an ASCII string. Hence, thenumber is in ASCII decimal notation. The meaning of the string depends on the argument usedwith the command. If the argument is HSM (for high speed memory) or the RAM (for Disk), the string represents the number of bytes (2 times the number of points) available in thatmemory. If the CM (for control memory) argument is used, the string represents the number line entries which are still available; one line is used per loaded/linked file.

FORMAT:

MEMORY argMEM arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

HSM (high speed memory)RAM (RAM memory)CM (control buffer)

DEFAULTS:

Unspecified Argument: HSM

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

MEMORY CM;MEM CM;

COMMENTS

This command will resultin representing the numberof entries available in theControl Memory. AnASCII decimal number of 0 to682 would be returned.

QUERY RESPONSES: The same ASCII string is returned regardless ofCOMM_HEADER setting.

5-102

Page 210: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Action Command (also Query Type Command) VIEW

(VIEW)

This is a query command which returns all current 9112 settings in a form which may bereturned to the 9112 as program messages, or sent back to the 9112 as a Setup file. Theformat of the output is the short form header naming a parameter, an "=" sign, and the currentsetting, followed by a semicolon. The length of the output is less than 1200 bytes. "Modes"which are necessary to interpret certain settings are always output before those settings.

FORMAT:

VIEW

EXAMPLES: COMMAND COMMENTS

VIEW; Returns all settings.

(See Section 4, Figure 4.which shows the completeview display/output.)

QUERY RESPONSES: The same formatted string as seen on a 9100/CP is returned.It is variable length with CRLF each 16 bytes. Unused linesare padded with spaces. It is terminated with semicolon and issuitable for direct viewing.

5-103

Page 211: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

COMMUNICATIONS COMMAND

Communications Command COMM_BLOCKSIZE

(CBLS)

Sets the output blocksize for block transfers over the bus from the 9112 (maximum number ofbytes per block). The blocksize includes all bytes in the block including format, data, checksum,and trailer.

FORMAT:

CBLS argCOMM_BLOCKSIZE arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:arg: blocksize in bytes - may from 0 to 65,536 in 8 byte increments. If set to 0 the

data are sent as a single block.

DEFAULT:

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

COMM BLOCKSIZE1024

COMMENTS

Sets blocksize to 1024 byteswhen sent.

5-104

Page 212: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Communications Command COMM FORMAT

(CFMT)

Determines the data format for block transfers of waveform data over the GPIB. See FileHandling Commands. Only two formats are supported.

FORMAT:

COMM FORMAT 9, BYTE, BINARY

and

COMM FORMAT L, BYTE,m

VALID ARGUMENTS:

HEX

HEX results in 2 characters for each 8 bits of data.

BIN (BINARY) implies simple binary format, 1 byte for 1 byte.

DEFAULTS:

9, BYTE, BINARY

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

COMM FORMAT L, BYTE, HEX;CFMT L, BYTE, HEX;

COMMENTS

Format is L with 8 bits ofdata and 2 HEX characterseach.

NOTES: COMM FORMAT O, ASCII only; (all letters and numbers are interpreted ascharacters) is always used for SETUP and SEQUENCE files.

5-105

Page 213: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Communications Command

Defines the header format used by the 9112 in response to queries.

FORMAT:

CHDR argCOMM_HEADER arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

OFF, SHORT, LONG

arg: OFF presents no header with the data

SHORT presents the short form of the header

LONG presents the long form of the header

DEFAULT:

arg: SHORT

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

COMM HEADER OFF;CDPR = OFF;

COMM_HEADER(CHDR)

COMMENTS

Data file will be sent with noheader information.

5-106

Page 214: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Communications Commands MASK

This command causes a value of a particular STB to be masked (0) or unmasked (1). Pleasesee Operation of Status Bytes at the beginning of Chapter 5.

FORMAT:

MASK argl, arg2

VALID ARGUMENTS:

argl: defines which STB is to be masked and can be any decimal ASCII number 1through 8.

arg2: decimal ASCII representation of a byte value where each bit equal to 1 unmasksthe corresponding bit in the STB.

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

MASK 2, 128;

COMMENTS

This would stop the value 128on STB 2 from causing a SRQto be generated.

5-107

Page 215: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Communications Command STB

STB is the command used to query the 9112 regarding SRQ’s on the GPIB. If no argument ispresented, the values of all 8 status bytes are returned, separated by comma. If 9 numbers (1through 8) is used as an argument, a status byte will be returned which represents more detailedinformation about the condition represented by that particular bit of the main status byte. Whena STB command is received the respective byte is cleared. The values sent back are ASCIIdecimal (NR1 format),

FORMAT:

STB arg

VALID ARGUMENTS:

the numbers 1 through 8

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

STB 2; This would cause the 9112 tosend status byte 2, which wouldcontain a value indicatingthat a self test fault conditionexists. (self-test fault is thesecond bit of the main statusbyte)

NOTES: See "Operation of the Status Bytes" at the beginning of Chapter 5.

5-108

Page 216: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

Communications Command TSTB

This command operates exactly like the STB command, except that the byte is not cleared. Inaddition, TSTB,0; reads a byte which cannot be cleared (and is therefore not readable bySTB,0). Please see Table 5.1.

NOTES: See Operation of the Status Bytes at the beginning of Chapter 5.

5-109

Page 217: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

Table 5.6

GPIB COMMAND SUMMARY

FILE HANDLINGCOMMANDS

DELETE (DELE)

END

LEARN_SETUP (LEARN)

LINK

LOAD

NEXT

RECALL (RCL)

STORE (STR)

Causes the named file to be deleted from the RAM Disk.

Used as the last command in a Setup or Sequence file.

Causes all existing instrument settings (parameters) to saved into a specified file name (or default name).

Causes the named waveform to be added to the high speedmemory, beginning at the end of the last waveformpreviously LOADED or LINKED.

Causes a specified waveform to be moved from the RAMmemory to the operating memory.

Used to cause a Sequence file to resume execution.

Causes the generator to send the contents of the specifiedfile.

Causes Waveform, Setup or Sequence files to be movedfrom the GPIB to the generator’s internal RAM memory.STORE must be used to transfer files to RAM memorybefore a LOAD command can be used to transfer them toHigh Speed Memory.

ACTION COMMANDS

ABORT (ABO)

ARBITRARY (ARB)

ARM

CALIBRATE (CAL)

CLEAR (CLE)

Immediately stops the waveform being generated withoutwaiting for its end point.

Selects Arbitrary Function Mode.

Arms the trigger from the bus.

Initiates a self calibration cycle.

Resets all instrument settings to the power-up defaults.

5-110

Page 218: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

GO

NEXT

SELFTEST (SEE)

SETUP (SET)

SEQUENCE (SEQ)

STOP

TRIGGER (TGR)

CHANNEL PARAMETERCOMMANDS

CHI_AMPLITUDE (C1A)

CH I_DIGITAL_WORD (C 1D)

CH 1_INVERT (Cll)

CH I_LOAD_COMP (C 1L)

CH 1_OFFSET (C10)

CH 1_OUTPUT (C 1P)

CH I_ZERO_REF (C 1Z)

CH2_AMPLITUDE (C2A)

CH2_DIGITAL_WORD (C2D)

CH2_INVERT (C2I)

CH2_LOAD_COMP (C2L)

CH2_OFFSET (C20)

Causes the waveform(s) loaded into High Speed Memory be executed (generated).

Used to continue a sequence file after WAIT.

Performs SELFTEST.

Causes the named setup file to be executed.

Causes the named sequence file to execute.

Same as Abort.

Used to trigger from the bus.

Sets the amplitude of the waveform being generated onChannel 1.

Turns the Channel 1 Digital Word Output on and off.

Inverts the waveform in Channel 1.

Invokes load compensation in Channel 1.

Sets the CH1 DC offset level.

Turns on and off the CH1 output relay.

Sets the amplitude point which represents the DC offsetvoltage for CH1.

Sets the amplitude of the waveform being generated onChannel 2.

Turns the Channel 2 Digital Word Output on and off.

Inverts the waveform in Channel 2.

Invokes load compensation in Channel 2.

Sets the CH2 DC offset level.

5-111

Page 219: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

CH2 OUTPUT (C2P)

CH2_ZERO_REF (C2Z)

Turns on and off the CH2 output relay.

Sets the amplitude point which represents the DC offsetvoltage for CH2.

TIMEBASE COMMANDS

CLOCK_LEVEL (CLEV)

CLOCK_MODE (CMOD)

CLOCK_PERIOD (CPER)

CLOCK_RATE (CRAT)

CLOCK_REFERENCE (CREF)

CLOCK_SLOPE (CSLO)

CLOCK_SOURCE (CSOU)

Sets the threshold level for the external clock.

Selects master or slave operating mode.

Sets the internal clock period.

Sets the internal clock repetition frequency.

Select internal or external 4 MHz reference for the 9112’sinternal clock generation circuitry.

Selects the edge of the external clock that the generatorwill respond to.

Sets the source for the generator clock to Internal orExternal.

TRIGGER COMMANDS

TRIG_ARM_SOURCE (TAS)

TRIG_DELAY (TDEL)

TRIG_LEVEL (TLEV)

TRIG_MODE (TMOD)

TRIOSLOPE (TSLO)

TRIG_SOURCE (TSOU)

MARKER_DELAY (MDEL)

DELAY_MODE (DMOD)

Selects the source for arming the trigger.

Sets the delay from the trigger point to start of waveform.

Sets the threshold for an external trigger.

Sets the mode in which the waveform is generated:Continuous, Recurrent, Single, Burst or Gated.

Sets the triggering slope of an external signal.

Selects the source of the trigger signal.

Sets the delay of the marker pulse.

Set whether TRIGGER DELAY and MARKER_DELAYwill be set in either POINTS or TIME.

5-112

Page 220: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

COMMUNICATIONSCOMMANDS

COMM_BLOCKSIZE (CBLS)

COMM_FORMAT (CFMT)

COMM_HEADER (CHDR)

STB

TSTB

MASK

STANDARD FUNCTIONCOMMANDS

STANDARD (STAN)

SINE

SINE_MODE (SMOD)

SINE_FREQUENCY (SIFR)

SINE_CH 1_PHASE (SC 1P)

SINE_CH2_PHASE (SC2P)

SQUARE (SQU)

SQUARE_MODE (SQMD)

SQUARE_FREQUENCY (SQFR)

SQUARE_PHASE (SQUP)

SQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASE(SQRP)

TRIANGLE (TRI)

Sets the blocksize for block transfers over the bus.

Determines the data format for block transfers over thebus.

Defines the header format (LONG, SHORT or OFF) usedin bus communications.

Causes the AFG to send its status byte. Clears the byte.

Same as STB but the byte is not cleared.

Masks bits of the specified status byte.

Selects Standard Function Generation Mode.

Select sine wave as the current standard function.

Select single or dual channel sine wave generation.

Sets the frequency of the sine standard function.

Sine Channel 1 starting phase.

Sine Channel 2 relative phase.

Select square wave as the current standard function.

Selects single or dual channel square wave generation.

Sets the frequency of the square standard function.

Square Channel 1 starting phase.

Square Channel 2 relative phase.

Select triangle wave as the current standard function.

5-113

Page 221: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB

TRIANGLE_MODE (TRIM) Selects single or dual channel triangle wave generation.

TRIANGLE_FREQUENCY (TRFR) Sets the frequency of the triangle standard function.

TRIANGLEPHASE (TRIP) Set start time of the triangle,

TRIANGLE-RELATIVE PHASE

(TRRP) Set start time of Channel 2’s triangle wave relative toChannel 1.

RAMP Select ramp as the current standard function.

RAMPMODE (RMOD) Selects single or dual channel ramp generation.

RAMP_PERIOD (RPER) Select the duration of standard function ramp.

RAMP_PHASE (RMPP) Set start time of the ramp.

RAMP_RELATIVE_PHASE (RPRP) Set Channel 2 start time relative to Channel

PULSE (PUL) Select pulse as the current standard function.

PULSE_WIDTH (PWID) Select the duration of the high part of the standardfunction pulse waveform.

PULSE_PERIOD (PPER) Select the period of the standard function pulse (notmeaningful in single trigger mode),

PULSE_DELAY (PDEL) Set the portion of the period preceding the high part of thepulse.

PULSE_OPTIMIZE (POPT) Ask the 9112 to achieve highest accuracy on pulseWIDTH, pulse PERIOD or pulse DELAY.

DC Select DC as the current standard function.

DC_MODE (DCMD) Select single or dual channel DC level generation.

DC 1_VOLTS (DC1) Specifies the desired DC output voltage for CH1.

DC2_VOLTS (DC2) Specifies the desired DC output voltage for CH2.

5-114

Page 222: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Operating Over the GPIB 5

QUERY COMMANDS

ACTIVE_FILES (AFIL)

DIRECTORY (DIR)

EXIST (EXIS)

FUNCTION (FUNC)

MEMORY (MEM)

IDENTIFY (ID)

VIEW

A query command which causes the names of all thecurrently active files to be returned.

A query command which causes the names of all files to bereturned.

A query command which causes the AFG to indicatewhether a file exists, and if so, the file length.

A query command which returns either ARBITRARY,STANDARD or the current standard function.

A query command, causes the AFG to retugn a numberindicating the amount of free memory.

Causes the generator to return its bus address, modelnumber and SW version.

Returns all current 9112 settings in exactly the same formdisplayed on the 9100/CP handheld control panel. Themessages are in a form which may be returned to the 9112as program messages.

5-115

Page 223: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

6 I RS-232-INTERFACE

OPERATING OVER THERS-232C INTERFACE

Selecting theRS-232C Interface

Configuring theRS-232C Interface

The 9112 responds to one interface at a time. The currentlyactive interface is also called the "communications source" orCOMM SOURCE. Switch 3 on the GPIB switch blockdetermines which interface is the default COMM SOURCE.This switch is read only at power up. (All rear panel switchesare read only at power up.)

If switch 3 on the GPIB switch block is up (1), the defaultCOMM_SOURCE is GPIB. The RS-232 port will not be activeuntil the command "COMM_SOURCE,RS232;" is received fromGPIB.

If switch 3 on the GPIB switch block is down (0), the defaultCOMM SOURCE is RS-232C. The RS-232 port will be active(and the GPIB port inactive) until the command"COMM_SOURCE,GPIB;" is received from RS-232.

The eight switches on the RS-232 switch block configure theRS-232 interface as follows:

Stop DataBits Parity Bits -- Baud --1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 <--Switch

0 one 0 0 None 0 eight 0 1 1 0 300 baud1 two 0 1 None 1 seven 0 1 1 1 600 baud

1 0 Even 1 0 0 0 1200baud1 1 Odd 1 0 1 1 2400 baud

1 1 0 1 4800 baud1 1 1 1 9600 baud--other-- 9600 baud

The RS-232 switch block is read only at power up. Theseswitches are the only way to configure the RS-232 interface.The selected RS-232 configuration must match the user’sterminal configuration.

The 25 pin RS-232 (type DB 25S) connector on the rear panelof the LeCroy 9112 is wired as Data CommunicationsEquipment (DCE). An appropriate cable should be used connect the user’s terminal or computer serial port to the 9112.

6-1

Page 224: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface

RS-232C COMMANDS

Using RS-232

All commands available over GPIB are available over RS-232C(see Chapter 5 of this manual). The commands at the end this chapter apply only to RS-232C.

Major differences between GPIB and RS-232 operation are asfollows:

1. There is no "EOI" wire on RS-232 to mark the end of alogical group of characters, such as a command. Therefore,all commands must end with semicolon (;). File transfersmust end with the character (sequence) defined COMM RS CONFIG, see below.

2. If the COMM SOURCE is RS-232, any unmasked event orcondition which would cause a Service Request over GPIBcauses a BEL character (control-G, binary 7) to be sentover RS-232. This makes most terminals beep. The servicerequest character(s) can be user selected by the commandCOMM RS SRQ,abc;, where the "abc" argument representsup to 3 bytes to be sent to signify a service request. Thequery command COMM RS SRO? returns the currentequivalent SRQ character(s).

3. The 9112 produces a prompt (by default "AFG\>") overRS-232 when it is ready for a command. This correspondsto the "Operation Complete" condition. This prompt willfirst be issued about 20 seconds after powering on the 9112,after self-calibration and initialization. The prompt may bechanged, as shown in the example below.

NOTE: The STB and TSTB commands do not generateOperation Complete so as not to change the statusinformation they read out. Over RS-232, this means that anew prompt is not generated after the response to STB orTSTB.

4. The 9112 will not transfer binary data over RS-232, since itis not possible to do so if "seven data bits" has beenselected. Instead of the "#9" binary format used over GPIBthe "#L" format is used over RS-232. This format is similarto the "#9" format described in Section 5 of this manual,except that each byte which would follow the #9 isrepresented by two ASCII characters each representing abase 16 or ("hex’) digit. The digits 0-9, and A-F whereA-F stand for 10, 11, 12... 15 respectively. Two hex digitscan be recombined to make a byte as follows:

byte = ((value of hex digit 1) * 16) + value of hex digit

5. The Local LED on the 9112 will remain lit even whileremote operations via RS-232 are in process.

6-2

Page 225: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface 6

A Typical RS-232C Dialog

.The RS-232 equivalent of the GPIB "three wire handshake"is the XON/XOFF (Ctrl Q/Ctrl S) software handshake.This handshake is enabled by sending the escape sequence"Esc)". This is the default state. Once enabled, sending Ctrl S command will stop RS-232 data transfer. The Ctrl Qcommand will resume transfer. The handshake is disabledby the command "Esc(". See Table 5.3 for Escapecommands which control this feature and other RS-232related features.

A transcript of RS-232 communication with a 9112 follows.

Prompt, Command & Response Commentsas displayed on terminal (not displayed)

AFG\>dir; CALERR .SEQNO .SET FILESNO .WAV FILESNO .WAD FILES

AFG\>sine;AFG\>go;AFG\>mem,hsm; 130072

AFG\>sifr? ;+ 100.0E+03;

AFG\>sifr, 10KHz;AFG\>sifr?;+ 10.00E+03;

AFG\>mem,hsm; 121072

AFG\>recall,calerr.seq;AFG\>#0Calibration completedsuccessfullyl

"AFG\>" = prompt at power on"dir;" = our first commandthe rest is the answer

prompt and command

prompt, command and response

recall a file from file memory

AFG\>comm_prompt, 9112>;9112>abort;9112>csrc,gpib;

Note the prompts

Change the prompt.Stop generating a waveform.Change the COMM_SOURCE.NOTE: There is no promptafter this.

6-3

Page 226: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface

RS-232-C COMMANDS

RS-232C Command COMM RS CONF

This command is used to define the file terminating sequence over RS232, which is equivalentto receiving a byte with EOI via GPIB.

FORMAT:

COMM RS CONF,bytel,byte2;

VALID ARGUMENTS:

bytel; byte2: Any valid hex digit or alpha character used in commands.

DEFAULTS:

26 (Control Z)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

COMM RS CONF,42; Sets up a one charactertermination sequence,with "*" as the oneterminating character.

COMM RS CONF,40,41; Sets up a two-charactertermination sequence,with "0" as thetwo-charactertermination sequence.

QUERY RESPONSE:

COMM RS CONF 7 returns current terminating sequence.

NOTES:

1. This sequence is sent after the last data byte of a block, to tell the 9112 to close the file -no more blocks are coming.

2. There is no restriction on the value of the one or two bytes making up the terminationsequence. However, it is advisable that the values NOT be

a. any valid hex digit or alpha character used in commands

b. "#", the beginning of a block delimiter.

6-4

Page 227: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface 6

Careful use of the terminating sequence will enable the user to transfer multiple file blockssequentially via RS-232C. The 9112 behavior when receiving a file in #L format from RS232can be summarized as follows:

At the end of a block: If the next two characters are "#L", another block is accepted.

If the next one (or two) characters are the defined terminatingsequence, the file is closed normally.

If the next character is "#" but the subsequent character is not"L", an error code is generated. The file is not saved.

If the next character is the first of a two-character terminationsequence but the subsequent character is not the secondcharacter of the termination sequence, an error code isgenerated. The file is not saved.

In the middle of a block: If the next one (or two) characters are the defined terminationsequence, the file is closed normally. An error code is generatedindicating that the block was shorter than expected.

If the next character is the first character of a two-charactertermination sequence, but the subsequent character is not thesecond character of the termination sequence, an error code isgenerated. The file is not saved.

If the next character is not part of the termination sequenceand is not a valid hex digit ("0" through "9" and "A" through"F"), an error code is generated. The file is not saved.

6-5

Page 228: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface

RS-232C COMMAND COMM_PROMPT

This command is used to define the prompt returned by the 9112 over RS232.

FORMAT:

COMM PROMPT,prompt string;

VALID ARGUMENTS:

prompt string: An ASCII character string with a maximum of eight characters.

DEFAULTS:

AFG\>

EXAMPLE: COMMAND

COMM_PROMPT,9112>;

COMMENTS

Changes RS-232Cprompt to "9112>"

6-6

Page 229: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

RS-232 Interface 6

RS-232C Command COMM RS SRQ

This command is used to define the service request response sent over RS232, which isequivalent to receiving a service request (SRQ) via GPIB.

FORMAT:

COMM RS SRQ,bytel,byte2,byte3;

VALID ARGUMENTS:

bytel,byte2, byte3: Valid decimal ASCII characters or control codes

DEFAULTS:

ASCII 7 (Control-O, Bel)

EXAMPLE: COMMAND COMMENTS

COMM RS SRQ,61; Sets SRQ response onRS- 232C to "="

COMM RS SRQ,83,82,81; Sets SRQ response onRS- 232C to "SRQ"

QUERY RESPONSE: COMM RS SRQ ? returns current SRQ response termination sequence.

NOTES:

1. This sequence is sent by the 9112 over the RS-232C interface to indicate a conditionrequiring an operators attention. A summary of required service conditions, status bytes,and status byte masks are included in the GPIB programming section, Chapter 5, of theoperating manual.

2. The default condition is Control-G or BEL which will cause the RS-232C terminal orterminal emulator to emit its bell tone.

3. The service request condition in RS-232C is cleared by issuing the STB ? query commandand reading the response from the 9112.

6-7

Page 230: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Appendix 1

SEQUENCE FILE COMMANDS

The four commands usable only in Sequence files are PAUSE, START, LOOP and NOTE. Allare described below.

PAUSEformat: PAUSE arg 1arg 1: number between 2 and 24000 (NR3 format acceptable)possible errors: 91 = command only valid in batch

90 = batch mode error (i.e., argl out of limits)

This command causes the AFG to do absolutely nothing until the specified number of tics ofthe 10 msec internal clock have occurred. Only hardware controlled functions, such aswaveform generation, continue during a pause. Examples of things that don’t continue areaccepting characters from GPIB and reacting to the 9100/CP. After the pause, sequenceexecution continues.

Example: PAUSE 100; Causes the 9100 to do nothing for 1 second.

STARTformat: STARTpossible errors: 91 = command only valid in batch

This command begins a loop in a batch file. The LOOP command marks the end of the loop.Loops can not be nested in one sequence file. However, sequence files are nestable and eachlevel may have a loop.

A START without a LOOP does not generate an error.

EXAMPLES:C1A,0.1V, DELTA; START; C1A,INCREMENT; PAUSE 100; LOOP 10;

The above segment of a sequence file would cause the amplitude of channel one to increasein 10 steps of 0.1 V per step. After each amplitude change, the sequence file pauses forone second.

START; SEQUENCE,LEVEL2.SEQ; LOOP 10;

This segment of a sequence file runs a second sequence file ten times. The secondsequence file may also have a loop, etc.

LOOPformat: LOOP arglargl: a number from 1 to 32767 (NR3 format acceptable)

possible errors: 91 = command only valid in batch90 = batch mode error (i.e., not preceded by START)

For a description of this command, see START.

A-1

Page 231: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Appendix I

Attempts to nest loops will cause an error on the second LOOP command. For example:

--- bad ...... good ---

START; ignored START; start of loopSTART; start of loop SEQ,B.SEQ; contains a loopLOOP,10; end of loop LOOP,20; end of loopLOOP,20; causes error 90

NOTEformat: NOTE arg 1 [,arg2 [ .... ] ]argl - argn: any ASCII characters except semicolon.

NOTE: The 9100 will replace any characters it regards as delimiters with a comma.possible errors: 91 = command only valid in batch

This command prints out its arguments (all upper case) to the currently activeCOMM SOURCE, separated by commas, and followed by carriage return and line feed.

If the current COMM_source IS RS-232, then the message is sent in its entirety beforesequence execution continues.

If the COMM_SOURCE is GPIB, the message is queued for output and sequence executioncontinues immediately; if you do not take this message before the next NOTE command it willbe lost.

The total length of a NOTE command (from the first character to the semicolon) must be lessthan 80 characters for the command to be processed.

EXAMPLE:

NOTE reached point#l; prints "REACHED,POINT#1"<cr><lf>

NOTE This is a test; prints "THIS,IS,A,TEST"<cr><If>

A-2

Page 232: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

AABORTAborting WaveformsAction CommandsAction Keys[ACTIVE]ACTIVE FILESAddressingAmplitudeARBITRARYArbitrary WaveformsARMArm ModesArmed LED

B[BACK]BatteriesBattery Low LEDBinary TransferBLOCKSIZEBlock Format 0Block Format 9Block Format LBlocksBurst

CC1 AMPC1 PHASE>C2 REL PH>CALIBRATECH1 AMPLITUDECH I~_DIGITAL_WORDCH1 INVERTD

CH1 LOAD COMPCH 1-OFFSI~TCH 1-OUTPUTCH I_ZERO_REFCH2_AMPLITUDECH2_DIGITAL WORDCH2 INVERTCH2 LOAD COMPCH2-OFFSI~TCH2-OUTPUTCH2 ZERO REF[CHAN 1]

{INDEX

3-29, 5-344-445-15

4-84-455-96

5-I2-5, 3-13

5-354-425-364-372-9

[CHAN 2]Channel Parameter CommandsChannel Parameter SettingsCLEAR[CLOCK]CLOCK IN EXT

4-62-11

2-93-8

4-483-30, 5-18

3-6, 3-7, 5-183-6, 3-7, 5-19

5-183-15, 3-18

4-304-254-255-375-445-455-465-475-485-495-505-445-455-465-475-485-495-50

4-5

CLOCK IN REFCLOCK LEVELCLOCK OUT 1CLOCK OUT 2CLOCK PERIODCLOCK RATECLOCK SRCCLOCK LEVELCLOCK PERIODCLOCK RATECLOCK-REFERENCECLOCK SLOPECLOCK SOURCEClearing Local Lock Out[COMM]COMM BLOCKSIZECOMM FORMATCOMM_HEADERCOMM_PROMPTCOMM RS CONFCOMM RS SRQCOMM SOURCECommand FormatCommand ParametersCommunication CommandsConfiguring RS-232CContinuousControl Settings

DDCDC AttributeDC>DC MODEDCT VOLTS(DC 1-) (DC2)DELAY MODE <F0>DELAY>DELAY MODEDELETI~[DELETE]

4-55-163-125-38

4-52-122-124-332-122-124-334-334-335-525-565-545-575-555-51

5-54-48

5-1045-1055-106

6-66-46-76-I5-35-3

5-176-i

3-14, 3-183-12

5-934-284-245-945-955-954-384-285-585-244-18

Page 233: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

Delay CapabilitiesdelimiterDelimitersDevice Clear Messagedevice-dependent messagesDIG WORDDIRECTORYDisplay KeysDisplay SymbolsDual Waveform File

EEASYWAVE SoftwareEND[ENTER]Entry Changesenvironmental limitsEOIEXISTExecuting of Sequence FileExecuting Setup FileExecuting Waveform FilesExecuting WaveformsExternal Clock ReferenceExternal Clock SourceExternal Triggering

F[F] KEYSFile ConventionsFile Handling Commandsfile messageFile Structures[FUNC]FUNCTION

GGateGated[GO]GOGo To Local (GTL)GPIBGPIB Address ConfigurationGPIB Address Selection

INDEX

4-375-25-45-55-6

4-315-99

4-64-125-22

2-I5-25

4-7, 4-434-17

3-I5-4

5-985-225-205-234-443-283-283-27

4-63-4

5-155-2

5-184-5

5-97

3-153-184-8

3-29, 5-395-55-I

2-113-I

GPIB COMMAND SUMMARY 5-110GPIB FMT 4-48Group- Execute Trigger

message (GET) 5-5

HHEADER 4-48HEX ASCII Transfer 3-8

IIDENTIFY 5-101Information Keys 4-9INVERT 4-30Inverting 3-27

LLEARN SETUP 5-26LeCroy 9112 Command Set 5-15LINK 5-27, 5-53[LINK] 4-8, 4-43Linking, 4-20[LOAD] 4-8, 4-42LOAD 5-29LOAD CMP 4-31Load 3-9Loading 4-20[LOCAL] key 4-3Local LED 2-9Local Lock Out (LLO) 5-5Local Mode 5-1Lockout 4-3

MMARKER DELAY 5-59IMASK 5-7, 5-107MAV (message available) 5-7Main Menu Keys 4-5Main Status Byte (STB 1) 5-7Manual Trigger 2-9MEMORY 5-102Message Terminator 5-2Message Unit Separators 5-2

NNEXT 5-40Numeric Units Keypad 4-7

Page 234: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

INDEX

O Secondary Status Bytes 5-7OFFSET 4-30 Selected Device Clear (SDC) 5-5Offset 2-5, 3-13 Selecting and Arbitrary Waveform 4-21OPTIMIZE> 4-28 Self-Test 2-9OUTPUT 4-30 sequence file 3-30Output Filter 2-3, 2-14 sequence files 4-41

Sequence File 5-20P Serial Poll Enable (SPE) 5-6[PAGE] 4-6 Serial Poll Status Byte 5-9Parameter/Delta Submenus 4-13 Service 1-3PERIOD> 4-28 Service Request (SRQ) 5-6Power 2-9 setup file 4-40programming commands 5-15 Setup file 5-19PULSE 5-88PULSE> 4-24 [SHIFT ABORT] 4-8

[SHIFT ACTIVE] 4-9(PULSE), 4-27 [SHIFT COMM] 4-9PULSE_DELAY 5-91

[SHIFT DELETE] 4-9PULSE_OPTIMIZE 5-92

[SHIFT NEXT] 4-8PULSE_PERIOD 5-,90

[SHIFT SEQ] 4-8PULSE WIDTH 5-89

- [SHIFT SETUP] 4-9Q [SHIFT STB] 4-9Queries 5-6 [SHIFT TGR] 4-8Query Type Commands 5-17 [STATUS] 4-9

SINE 5-68R SINE> 4-24RAM disk 2-4 SINE CH1 PHASE 5-71RAMP 5-83 SINE-CH2-PHASE 5-72RAMP> 4-24 SINE-FREQUENCY 5-70RAMP_MODE 5-84 SINE MODE 5-69RAMP_PERIOD 5-85 Sine Attribute 4-25RAMP_PHASE 5-86 Single 3-14, 3-18RAMP RELATIVE PHASE 5-87- Single Waveform File 5-22Ramp Attribute 4-27 SOURCE 4-49RECALL 5-30 Sources 4-37Recurrent 3-15, 3-19 SQUARE 5-73Remote Enable 5-5 SQUARE> 4-24Remote Mode 5-1RS-232 Commands 6-2 SQUARE_FREQUENCY 5-75

RS-232 Configuration 2-11 SQUARE_MODE 5-74

RS-232 Interface 6-1 SQUARE_PHASE 5-76

RS232 FMT 4-48 SQUARE_RELATIVE_PHASE 5-77

rules o~ command format, 5-4 Square Attribute 4-25STANDARD 5-67

S Standard Function Commands 5-16

SELFTEST 5-41 Standard Functions 3-3

SEQUENCE 5-31 standard waveform 4-23SETUP 5-32 STATUS BYTES 5-10

Page 235: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

I INDEX

[STATUS] key 4-47STB 5-108STOP 5-42STORE 5-33STRDELIM 4-49[STB] 4-46

TTIME MARKER 4-39Time Per Point 3-14timebase 4-32Timebase Commands 5-16Timing Output Signal 3-17Transferring Waveform Data 3-6TRAILER 4-48TRIANGLE 5-78TRIANGLE> 4-24TRIANGLE_FREQUENCY 5-80TRIANGLE MODE 5-79ITRIANGLE PHASE 5-81TRIANGLE_RELATIVEPHASE 5-82Triangle Attribute 4-26[TRIG] 4-5TRIG ARM SRC > 4-38TRIG DELAY > 4-38TRIG LEVEL 4-39TRIG MODE > 4-38TRIG SLOPE 4-39TRIG SOURCE > 4-38TRIG ARM SOURCE 5-60TRIG-DEL,a~Y 5-61TRIG LEVEL 5-62TRIG MODE 5-63TRIG SLOPE 5-64

TRIG SOURCE 5-65TRIG~JER 5-43TRIGGER command 5-5TRIGGER MODE 3-14Trigger Commands 5-16Trigger Delay 3-27Trigger Modes 4-37TSTB 5-109

UUnpacking and Inspection 1-1Using RS-232 6-2

VVIEW 5-103[VIEW] 4-9, 4-44Voltage Selection 3-1

WWarranty 1-1waveform data memory 3-9waveform file formats 3-5Waveform Generation 2-2Waveform Generator Circuit 2-5WIDTH> 4-28

ZZ REF 4-30Zero Ref, 3-13

9100/CP 2-1, 4-19100/CP Control Panel 2-59100/SW 2-19100GPIB2 2-19112 2-19112 Architecture 2-3

Page 236: 9112 Arbitrary Function Generator Manualcdn.teledynelecroy.com/files/manuals/9112-om-e.pdf9112 System Description 2-1 9112 Waveform Generation Concept 2-2 9112 Architecture 2-3 Front

LeCroyInnovators In Instrumentation

Corporate Headquarters700 Chestnut Ridge RoadChestnut Ridge, NY 10977-6499Tel: (914) 425-2000, TWX: 710-577-2832

European HeadquartersRoute du Nant-d’Avril 1011217 Meyrin 1Geneva SwitzerlandTel: (022) 82 33

Copyright@ Octoberber, Igsg, LeCroy. All rights reserved, Information in thispublication supersedes all earlier versions, Specifications subject to change